<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Rezeau</id>
	<title>MoodleDocs - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Rezeau"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/Special:Contributions/Rezeau"/>
	<updated>2026-04-17T10:40:20Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.5</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Glossary_export_to_quiz&amp;diff=153970</id>
		<title>Glossary export to quiz</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Glossary_export_to_quiz&amp;diff=153970"/>
		<updated>2025-09-20T16:12:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Configuring an Export Glossary to Quiz block */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = Block&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=block_glossary_export_to_quiz&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/rezeau/moodle-block_glossary_export_to_quiz/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=162866&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[User:Joseph Rézeau|Joseph Rézeau]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information see [[Installing plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
A block to export a Glossary&#039;s entries to the Quiz Questions bank. Exports concepts &amp;amp; definitions to &#039;&#039;&#039;Short answer&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Multiple choice&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Matching&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;Drag and drop into text&#039;&#039;&#039; questions. Starting with the Moodle 3.6 version, it is also possible to export entries to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Gapfill&#039;&#039;&#039; contributed question type, if that plugin is installed on your Moodle site, of course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Export entries from Glossary to moodle quiz XML file==&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to access the block&#039;s configuration ===&lt;br /&gt;
After this block has been installed (by an Admin) on your Moodle site, it should be available to the site&#039;s users with a Teacher capability, in their own courses.&lt;br /&gt;
# As a teacher, go to your course&#039;s front page, Click on the main Actions icon to go into Edit mode and Turn editing on.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the side panel, click on Add a block. In the list which appears, click to select the Export Glossary to Quiz block.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Export Glossary to Quiz block gets displayed in your course&#039;s default block zone (depending on the current theme).&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the block&#039;s Action icon to configure the Export Glossary to Quiz block.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configuring an Export Glossary to Quiz block ===&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the drop-down list to &#039;&#039;&#039;select the glossary&#039;&#039;&#039; that you want to use to export its entries to the quiz questions bank. If that glossary contains categories, you can select one category to export its entries. To cancel your choice or to reset the block, simply leave that drop-down list on the Choose... position. Once a glossary has been selected, more options appear...&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Sorting Order&#039;&#039;&#039;. Use this setting to determine how the exported glossary entries will be ordered when you import them to your questions data bank. This can be used, in combination with the Maximum number of entries, for creating a quiz to test the latest entries to your glossary (especially a fairly large one).&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum number of entries to export&#039;&#039;&#039;. Leave this field empty (or at its default &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039; value) to export &#039;&#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039;&#039; entries from selected Glossary or Category. This option can be useful for exporting a limited number of entries from very large glossaries.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Select question type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
##&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Short answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; When you select this type, a Case sensitivity drop-down list is displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Case insensitive&#039;&#039;. Student responses will be accepted as correct regardless of the original glossary entry concept case (upper-case or lower-case). Example: original entry &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;. Accepted correct responses: &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;moodle&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Case sensitive. Student responses will be only be accepted as correct it the case of the original glossary entry concept is used. Example: original entry &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;. Accepted correct response: &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Multiple choice&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; questions will consist of the following elements: &#039;&#039;question text&#039;&#039; = glossary entry definition; &#039;&#039;correct answer&#039;&#039; = glossary entry concept; &#039;&#039;distracters&#039;&#039; = 2 (or more) glossary entry concepts randomly selected from the glossary (or glossary category) that you have selected. When you select this type, 3 drop-down lists get displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Number of choices&#039;&#039;. Select the number of total choices/answers you want to make available to the student (this number includes the correct answer plus the distracters).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Number the choices&#039;&#039; Select your preferred numbering style for the choices..&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Shuffle within questions&#039;  Select whether the answers will be shuffled.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Matching&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; questions will consist of a number of concepts and definitions which the student will have to match. A standard text of instructions will be added to the question: &#039;Match the definitions and the concepts&#039;. When you select this type, 2 drop-down lists get displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Number of choices&#039;&#039;. Select the number of pairs you want to make available for matching.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Shuffle within questions&#039;  Select whether the answers will be shuffled.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Drag and drop into text&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; questions will consist of a number of definitions which the student will have to complete by dragging &amp;amp; dropping the concepts into blanks. A standard text of instructions will be added to the question: &#039;Drag each concept label to match its definition&#039;. When you select this type, 2 drop-down lists get displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Number of choices&#039;&#039;. Select the number of articles you want to make available for each question.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Shuffle within questions&#039;  Select whether the answers will be shuffled.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## If the [[Gapfill question type|&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Gapfill&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question type]] is installed on your moodle site, it will appear as an option in the -- Select question type -- drop-down list. If you select the Gapfill question type, one more drop-down list will be displayed, where you can choose from the 3 display modes for Gapfill: gapfill, dragdrop or dropdown. If you select the gapfill or the dragdrop modes, you&#039;ll have a further option of fixed gap size.&lt;br /&gt;
## If the [[Guess it question type|&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Guessit&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question type]] is installed on your moodle site, the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle: guess a word&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in the -- Select question type -- drop-down list. You can only import from a Glossary that &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; option. 2 options will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
### Maximum number of tries&lt;br /&gt;
### Number of letters in wordle&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Save changes&#039;&#039;&#039; Upon saving the form validation check may throw out a message warning you that the number of entries or of choices you entered are incorrect. Please amend as needed before re-saving!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exporting the selected entries as questions to a moodle Questions XML file ==&lt;br /&gt;
# You are back in the course homepage, but now the block displays the settings you have selected.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Export n entries and create n questions&#039;&#039;&#039; link.&lt;br /&gt;
# Now you are on page Your course -&amp;gt; Glossaries -&amp;gt; [glosssary name] -&amp;gt; Glossary -&amp;gt; Export entries to Quiz (XML)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the Export button.&lt;br /&gt;
# At the prompt, save file to your computer. Its named after this pattern: &#039;&#039;&#039;[glosssary name] [QUESTIONTYPE (abbreviated)] questions.xml&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Return to course button/link. You see that the Export Glossary to Quiz block has been reset.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Import to the quiz questions bank==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In Administration block, click Questions to go to the Questions bank&lt;br /&gt;
# On the Edit questions page, Click the Import tab&lt;br /&gt;
# Set these settings:&lt;br /&gt;
## File format : Moodle XML format&lt;br /&gt;
## General&lt;br /&gt;
## Category Default&lt;br /&gt;
## Get category from file (check it)&lt;br /&gt;
# Import from file upload...&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the file you saved to your computer and click Upload this file button.&lt;br /&gt;
# If all goes well, the imported questions should get displayed on the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Continue.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the next page, the Question bank displays the new category name (formed on the name of the exported Glossary, plus the name of its category if you selected one of the glossary&#039;s categories) and of course all the questions that were imported&lt;br /&gt;
# You can now use these questions in a quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Block]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Exporter un glossaire vers un Test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Exportación de glosario a examen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Glossary_export_to_quiz&amp;diff=153969</id>
		<title>Glossary export to quiz</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Glossary_export_to_quiz&amp;diff=153969"/>
		<updated>2025-09-20T16:12:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Configuring an Export Glossary to Quiz block */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = Block&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=block_glossary_export_to_quiz&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/rezeau/moodle-block_glossary_export_to_quiz/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=162866&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[User:Joseph Rézeau|Joseph Rézeau]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information see [[Installing plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
A block to export a Glossary&#039;s entries to the Quiz Questions bank. Exports concepts &amp;amp; definitions to &#039;&#039;&#039;Short answer&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Multiple choice&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Matching&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;Drag and drop into text&#039;&#039;&#039; questions. Starting with the Moodle 3.6 version, it is also possible to export entries to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Gapfill&#039;&#039;&#039; contributed question type, if that plugin is installed on your Moodle site, of course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Export entries from Glossary to moodle quiz XML file==&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to access the block&#039;s configuration ===&lt;br /&gt;
After this block has been installed (by an Admin) on your Moodle site, it should be available to the site&#039;s users with a Teacher capability, in their own courses.&lt;br /&gt;
# As a teacher, go to your course&#039;s front page, Click on the main Actions icon to go into Edit mode and Turn editing on.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the side panel, click on Add a block. In the list which appears, click to select the Export Glossary to Quiz block.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Export Glossary to Quiz block gets displayed in your course&#039;s default block zone (depending on the current theme).&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the block&#039;s Action icon to configure the Export Glossary to Quiz block.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configuring an Export Glossary to Quiz block ===&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the drop-down list to &#039;&#039;&#039;select the glossary&#039;&#039;&#039; that you want to use to export its entries to the quiz questions bank. If that glossary contains categories, you can select one category to export its entries. To cancel your choice or to reset the block, simply leave that drop-down list on the Choose... position. Once a glossary has been selected, more options appear...&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Sorting Order&#039;&#039;&#039;. Use this setting to determine how the exported glossary entries will be ordered when you import them to your questions data bank. This can be used, in combination with the Maximum number of entries, for creating a quiz to test the latest entries to your glossary (especially a fairly large one).&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum number of entries to export&#039;&#039;&#039;. Leave this field empty (or at its default &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039; value) to export &#039;&#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039;&#039; entries from selected Glossary or Category. This option can be useful for exporting a limited number of entries from very large glossaries.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Select question type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
##&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Short answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; When you select this type, a Case sensitivity drop-down list is displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Case insensitive&#039;&#039;. Student responses will be accepted as correct regardless of the original glossary entry concept case (upper-case or lower-case). Example: original entry &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;. Accepted correct responses: &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;moodle&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Case sensitive. Student responses will be only be accepted as correct it the case of the original glossary entry concept is used. Example: original entry &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;. Accepted correct response: &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Multiple choice&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; questions will consist of the following elements: &#039;&#039;question text&#039;&#039; = glossary entry definition; &#039;&#039;correct answer&#039;&#039; = glossary entry concept; &#039;&#039;distracters&#039;&#039; = 2 (or more) glossary entry concepts randomly selected from the glossary (or glossary category) that you have selected. When you select this type, 3 drop-down lists get displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Number of choices&#039;&#039;. Select the number of total choices/answers you want to make available to the student (this number includes the correct answer plus the distracters).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Number the choices&#039;&#039; Select your preferred numbering style for the choices..&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Shuffle within questions&#039;  Select whether the answers will be shuffled.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Matching&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; questions will consist of a number of concepts and definitions which the student will have to match. A standard text of instructions will be added to the question: &#039;Match the definitions and the concepts&#039;. When you select this type, 2 drop-down lists get displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Number of choices&#039;&#039;. Select the number of pairs you want to make available for matching.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Shuffle within questions&#039;  Select whether the answers will be shuffled.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Drag and drop into text&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; questions will consist of a number of definitions which the student will have to complete by dragging &amp;amp; dropping the concepts into blanks. A standard text of instructions will be added to the question: &#039;Drag each concept label to match its definition&#039;. When you select this type, 2 drop-down lists get displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Number of choices&#039;&#039;. Select the number of articles you want to make available for each question.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Shuffle within questions&#039;  Select whether the answers will be shuffled.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## If the [[Gapfill question type|&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Gapfill&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question type]] is installed on your moodle site, it will appear as an option in the -- Select question type -- drop-down list. If you select the Gapfill question type, one more drop-down list will be displayed, where you can choose from the 3 display modes for Gapfill: gapfill, dragdrop or dropdown. If you select the gapfill or the dragdrop modes, you&#039;ll have a further option of fixed gap size. See the [[Gapfill_question_type|Gapfill question documentation]] for more info.&lt;br /&gt;
## If the [[Guess it question type|&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Guessit&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question type]] is installed on your moodle site, the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle: guess a word&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in the -- Select question type -- drop-down list. You can only import from a Glossary that &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; option. 2 options will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
### Maximum number of tries&lt;br /&gt;
### Number of letters in wordle&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Save changes&#039;&#039;&#039; Upon saving the form validation check may throw out a message warning you that the number of entries or of choices you entered are incorrect. Please amend as needed before re-saving!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exporting the selected entries as questions to a moodle Questions XML file ==&lt;br /&gt;
# You are back in the course homepage, but now the block displays the settings you have selected.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Export n entries and create n questions&#039;&#039;&#039; link.&lt;br /&gt;
# Now you are on page Your course -&amp;gt; Glossaries -&amp;gt; [glosssary name] -&amp;gt; Glossary -&amp;gt; Export entries to Quiz (XML)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the Export button.&lt;br /&gt;
# At the prompt, save file to your computer. Its named after this pattern: &#039;&#039;&#039;[glosssary name] [QUESTIONTYPE (abbreviated)] questions.xml&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Return to course button/link. You see that the Export Glossary to Quiz block has been reset.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Import to the quiz questions bank==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In Administration block, click Questions to go to the Questions bank&lt;br /&gt;
# On the Edit questions page, Click the Import tab&lt;br /&gt;
# Set these settings:&lt;br /&gt;
## File format : Moodle XML format&lt;br /&gt;
## General&lt;br /&gt;
## Category Default&lt;br /&gt;
## Get category from file (check it)&lt;br /&gt;
# Import from file upload...&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the file you saved to your computer and click Upload this file button.&lt;br /&gt;
# If all goes well, the imported questions should get displayed on the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Continue.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the next page, the Question bank displays the new category name (formed on the name of the exported Glossary, plus the name of its category if you selected one of the glossary&#039;s categories) and of course all the questions that were imported&lt;br /&gt;
# You can now use these questions in a quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Block]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Exporter un glossaire vers un Test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Exportación de glosario a examen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Glossary_export_to_quiz&amp;diff=153968</id>
		<title>Glossary export to quiz</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Glossary_export_to_quiz&amp;diff=153968"/>
		<updated>2025-09-20T16:10:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Configuring an Export Glossary to Quiz block */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = Block&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=block_glossary_export_to_quiz&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/rezeau/moodle-block_glossary_export_to_quiz/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=162866&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[User:Joseph Rézeau|Joseph Rézeau]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information see [[Installing plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
A block to export a Glossary&#039;s entries to the Quiz Questions bank. Exports concepts &amp;amp; definitions to &#039;&#039;&#039;Short answer&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Multiple choice&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Matching&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;Drag and drop into text&#039;&#039;&#039; questions. Starting with the Moodle 3.6 version, it is also possible to export entries to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Gapfill&#039;&#039;&#039; contributed question type, if that plugin is installed on your Moodle site, of course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Export entries from Glossary to moodle quiz XML file==&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to access the block&#039;s configuration ===&lt;br /&gt;
After this block has been installed (by an Admin) on your Moodle site, it should be available to the site&#039;s users with a Teacher capability, in their own courses.&lt;br /&gt;
# As a teacher, go to your course&#039;s front page, Click on the main Actions icon to go into Edit mode and Turn editing on.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the side panel, click on Add a block. In the list which appears, click to select the Export Glossary to Quiz block.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Export Glossary to Quiz block gets displayed in your course&#039;s default block zone (depending on the current theme).&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the block&#039;s Action icon to configure the Export Glossary to Quiz block.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configuring an Export Glossary to Quiz block ===&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the drop-down list to &#039;&#039;&#039;select the glossary&#039;&#039;&#039; that you want to use to export its entries to the quiz questions bank. If that glossary contains categories, you can select one category to export its entries. To cancel your choice or to reset the block, simply leave that drop-down list on the Choose... position. Once a glossary has been selected, more options appear...&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Sorting Order&#039;&#039;&#039;. Use this setting to determine how the exported glossary entries will be ordered when you import them to your questions data bank. This can be used, in combination with the Maximum number of entries, for creating a quiz to test the latest entries to your glossary (especially a fairly large one).&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum number of entries to export&#039;&#039;&#039;. Leave this field empty (or at its default &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039; value) to export &#039;&#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039;&#039; entries from selected Glossary or Category. This option can be useful for exporting a limited number of entries from very large glossaries.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Select question type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
##&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Short answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; When you select this type, a Case sensitivity drop-down list is displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Case insensitive&#039;&#039;. Student responses will be accepted as correct regardless of the original glossary entry concept case (upper-case or lower-case). Example: original entry &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;. Accepted correct responses: &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;moodle&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Case sensitive. Student responses will be only be accepted as correct it the case of the original glossary entry concept is used. Example: original entry &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;. Accepted correct response: &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Multiple choice&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; questions will consist of the following elements: &#039;&#039;question text&#039;&#039; = glossary entry definition; &#039;&#039;correct answer&#039;&#039; = glossary entry concept; &#039;&#039;distracters&#039;&#039; = 2 (or more) glossary entry concepts randomly selected from the glossary (or glossary category) that you have selected. When you select this type, 3 drop-down lists get displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Number of choices&#039;&#039;. Select the number of total choices/answers you want to make available to the student (this number includes the correct answer plus the distracters).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Number the choices&#039;&#039; Select your preferred numbering style for the choices..&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Shuffle within questions&#039;  Select whether the answers will be shuffled.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Matching&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; questions will consist of a number of concepts and definitions which the student will have to match. A standard text of instructions will be added to the question: &#039;Match the definitions and the concepts&#039;. When you select this type, 2 drop-down lists get displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Number of choices&#039;&#039;. Select the number of pairs you want to make available for matching.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Shuffle within questions&#039;  Select whether the answers will be shuffled.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Drag and drop into text&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; questions will consist of a number of definitions which the student will have to complete by dragging &amp;amp; dropping the concepts into blanks. A standard text of instructions will be added to the question: &#039;Drag each concept label to match its definition&#039;. When you select this type, 2 drop-down lists get displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Number of choices&#039;&#039;. Select the number of articles you want to make available for each question.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Shuffle within questions&#039;  Select whether the answers will be shuffled.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## If the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Gapfill&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question type is installed on your moodle site, it will appear as an option in the -- Select question type -- drop-down list. If you select the Gapfill question type, one more drop-down list will be displayed, where you can choose from the 3 display modes for Gapfill: gapfill, dragdrop or dropdown. If you select the gapfill or the dragdrop modes, you&#039;ll have a further option of fixed gap size. See the [[Gapfill_question_type|Gapfill question documentation]] for more info.&lt;br /&gt;
## If the [[Guess it question type|&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Guessit&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question type]] is installed on your moodle site, the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle: guess a word&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in the -- Select question type -- drop-down list. You can only import from a Glossary that &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; option. 2 options will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
### Maximum number of tries&lt;br /&gt;
### Number of letters in wordle&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Save changes&#039;&#039;&#039; Upon saving the form validation check may throw out a message warning you that the number of entries or of choices you entered are incorrect. Please amend as needed before re-saving!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exporting the selected entries as questions to a moodle Questions XML file ==&lt;br /&gt;
# You are back in the course homepage, but now the block displays the settings you have selected.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Export n entries and create n questions&#039;&#039;&#039; link.&lt;br /&gt;
# Now you are on page Your course -&amp;gt; Glossaries -&amp;gt; [glosssary name] -&amp;gt; Glossary -&amp;gt; Export entries to Quiz (XML)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the Export button.&lt;br /&gt;
# At the prompt, save file to your computer. Its named after this pattern: &#039;&#039;&#039;[glosssary name] [QUESTIONTYPE (abbreviated)] questions.xml&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Return to course button/link. You see that the Export Glossary to Quiz block has been reset.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Import to the quiz questions bank==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In Administration block, click Questions to go to the Questions bank&lt;br /&gt;
# On the Edit questions page, Click the Import tab&lt;br /&gt;
# Set these settings:&lt;br /&gt;
## File format : Moodle XML format&lt;br /&gt;
## General&lt;br /&gt;
## Category Default&lt;br /&gt;
## Get category from file (check it)&lt;br /&gt;
# Import from file upload...&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the file you saved to your computer and click Upload this file button.&lt;br /&gt;
# If all goes well, the imported questions should get displayed on the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Continue.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the next page, the Question bank displays the new category name (formed on the name of the exported Glossary, plus the name of its category if you selected one of the glossary&#039;s categories) and of course all the questions that were imported&lt;br /&gt;
# You can now use these questions in a quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Block]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Exporter un glossaire vers un Test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Exportación de glosario a examen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Glossary_export_to_quiz&amp;diff=153967</id>
		<title>Glossary export to quiz</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Glossary_export_to_quiz&amp;diff=153967"/>
		<updated>2025-09-20T16:08:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Configuring an Export Glossary to Quiz block */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = Block&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=block_glossary_export_to_quiz&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/rezeau/moodle-block_glossary_export_to_quiz/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=162866&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[User:Joseph Rézeau|Joseph Rézeau]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information see [[Installing plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
A block to export a Glossary&#039;s entries to the Quiz Questions bank. Exports concepts &amp;amp; definitions to &#039;&#039;&#039;Short answer&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Multiple choice&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Matching&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;Drag and drop into text&#039;&#039;&#039; questions. Starting with the Moodle 3.6 version, it is also possible to export entries to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Gapfill&#039;&#039;&#039; contributed question type, if that plugin is installed on your Moodle site, of course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Export entries from Glossary to moodle quiz XML file==&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to access the block&#039;s configuration ===&lt;br /&gt;
After this block has been installed (by an Admin) on your Moodle site, it should be available to the site&#039;s users with a Teacher capability, in their own courses.&lt;br /&gt;
# As a teacher, go to your course&#039;s front page, Click on the main Actions icon to go into Edit mode and Turn editing on.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the side panel, click on Add a block. In the list which appears, click to select the Export Glossary to Quiz block.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Export Glossary to Quiz block gets displayed in your course&#039;s default block zone (depending on the current theme).&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the block&#039;s Action icon to configure the Export Glossary to Quiz block.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configuring an Export Glossary to Quiz block ===&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the drop-down list to &#039;&#039;&#039;select the glossary&#039;&#039;&#039; that you want to use to export its entries to the quiz questions bank. If that glossary contains categories, you can select one category to export its entries. To cancel your choice or to reset the block, simply leave that drop-down list on the Choose... position. Once a glossary has been selected, more options appear...&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Sorting Order&#039;&#039;&#039;. Use this setting to determine how the exported glossary entries will be ordered when you import them to your questions data bank. This can be used, in combination with the Maximum number of entries, for creating a quiz to test the latest entries to your glossary (especially a fairly large one).&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum number of entries to export&#039;&#039;&#039;. Leave this field empty (or at its default &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039; value) to export &#039;&#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039;&#039; entries from selected Glossary or Category. This option can be useful for exporting a limited number of entries from very large glossaries.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Select question type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
##&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Short answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; When you select this type, a Case sensitivity drop-down list is displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Case insensitive&#039;&#039;. Student responses will be accepted as correct regardless of the original glossary entry concept case (upper-case or lower-case). Example: original entry &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;. Accepted correct responses: &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;moodle&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Case sensitive. Student responses will be only be accepted as correct it the case of the original glossary entry concept is used. Example: original entry &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;. Accepted correct response: &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Multiple choice&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; questions will consist of the following elements: &#039;&#039;question text&#039;&#039; = glossary entry definition; &#039;&#039;correct answer&#039;&#039; = glossary entry concept; &#039;&#039;distracters&#039;&#039; = 2 (or more) glossary entry concepts randomly selected from the glossary (or glossary category) that you have selected. When you select this type, 3 drop-down lists get displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Number of choices&#039;&#039;. Select the number of total choices/answers you want to make available to the student (this number includes the correct answer plus the distracters).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Number the choices&#039;&#039; Select your preferred numbering style for the choices..&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Shuffle within questions&#039;  Select whether the answers will be shuffled.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Matching&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; questions will consist of a number of concepts and definitions which the student will have to match. A standard text of instructions will be added to the question: &#039;Match the definitions and the concepts&#039;. When you select this type, 2 drop-down lists get displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Number of choices&#039;&#039;. Select the number of pairs you want to make available for matching.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Shuffle within questions&#039;  Select whether the answers will be shuffled.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Drag and drop into text&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; questions will consist of a number of definitions which the student will have to complete by dragging &amp;amp; dropping the concepts into blanks. A standard text of instructions will be added to the question: &#039;Drag each concept label to match its definition&#039;. When you select this type, 2 drop-down lists get displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Number of choices&#039;&#039;. Select the number of articles you want to make available for each question.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Shuffle within questions&#039;  Select whether the answers will be shuffled.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## If the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Gapfill&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question type is installed on your moodle site, it will appear as an option in the -- Select question type -- drop-down list. If you select the Gapfill question type, one more drop-down list will be displayed, where you can choose from the 3 display modes for Gapfill: gapfill, dragdrop or dropdown. If you select the gapfill or the dragdrop modes, you&#039;ll have a further option of fixed gap size. See the [[Gapfill_question_type|Gapfill question documentation]] for more info.&lt;br /&gt;
## If the [[Guessit question type|&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Guessit&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question type]] is installed on your moodle site, the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle: guess a word&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in the -- Select question type -- drop-down list. You can only import from a Glossary that &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; option. 2 options will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
### Maximum number of tries&lt;br /&gt;
### Number of letters in wordle&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Save changes&#039;&#039;&#039; Upon saving the form validation check may throw out a message warning you that the number of entries or of choices you entered are incorrect. Please amend as needed before re-saving!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exporting the selected entries as questions to a moodle Questions XML file ==&lt;br /&gt;
# You are back in the course homepage, but now the block displays the settings you have selected.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Export n entries and create n questions&#039;&#039;&#039; link.&lt;br /&gt;
# Now you are on page Your course -&amp;gt; Glossaries -&amp;gt; [glosssary name] -&amp;gt; Glossary -&amp;gt; Export entries to Quiz (XML)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the Export button.&lt;br /&gt;
# At the prompt, save file to your computer. Its named after this pattern: &#039;&#039;&#039;[glosssary name] [QUESTIONTYPE (abbreviated)] questions.xml&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Return to course button/link. You see that the Export Glossary to Quiz block has been reset.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Import to the quiz questions bank==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In Administration block, click Questions to go to the Questions bank&lt;br /&gt;
# On the Edit questions page, Click the Import tab&lt;br /&gt;
# Set these settings:&lt;br /&gt;
## File format : Moodle XML format&lt;br /&gt;
## General&lt;br /&gt;
## Category Default&lt;br /&gt;
## Get category from file (check it)&lt;br /&gt;
# Import from file upload...&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the file you saved to your computer and click Upload this file button.&lt;br /&gt;
# If all goes well, the imported questions should get displayed on the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Continue.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the next page, the Question bank displays the new category name (formed on the name of the exported Glossary, plus the name of its category if you selected one of the glossary&#039;s categories) and of course all the questions that were imported&lt;br /&gt;
# You can now use these questions in a quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Block]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Exporter un glossaire vers un Test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Exportación de glosario a examen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Glossary_export_to_quiz&amp;diff=153119</id>
		<title>Glossary export to quiz</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Glossary_export_to_quiz&amp;diff=153119"/>
		<updated>2025-05-23T20:39:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Import to the quiz questions bank */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = Block&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=block_glossary_export_to_quiz&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/rezeau/moodle-block_glossary_export_to_quiz/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=162866&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[User:Joseph Rézeau|Joseph Rézeau]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information see [[Installing plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
A block to export a Glossary&#039;s entries to the Quiz Questions bank. Exports concepts &amp;amp; definitions to &#039;&#039;&#039;Short answer&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Multiple choice&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Matching&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;Drag and drop into text&#039;&#039;&#039; questions. Starting with the Moodle 3.6 version, it is also possible to export entries to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Gapfill&#039;&#039;&#039; contributed question type, if that plugin is installed on your Moodle site, of course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Export entries from Glossary to moodle quiz XML file==&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to access the block&#039;s configuration ===&lt;br /&gt;
After this block has been installed (by an Admin) on your Moodle site, it should be available to the site&#039;s users with a Teacher capability, in their own courses.&lt;br /&gt;
# As a teacher, go to your course&#039;s front page, Click on the main Actions icon to go into Edit mode and Turn editing on.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the side panel, click on Add a block. In the list which appears, click to select the Export Glossary to Quiz block.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Export Glossary to Quiz block gets displayed in your course&#039;s default block zone (depending on the current theme).&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the block&#039;s Action icon to configure the Export Glossary to Quiz block.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configuring an Export Glossary to Quiz block ===&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the drop-down list to &#039;&#039;&#039;select the glossary&#039;&#039;&#039; that you want to use to export its entries to the quiz questions bank. If that glossary contains categories, you can select one category to export its entries. To cancel your choice or to reset the block, simply leave that drop-down list on the Choose... position. Once a glossary has been selected, more options appear...&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Sorting Order&#039;&#039;&#039;. Use this setting to determine how the exported glossary entries will be ordered when you import them to your questions data bank. This can be used, in combination with the Maximum number of entries, for creating a quiz to test the latest entries to your glossary (especially a fairly large one).&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum number of entries to export&#039;&#039;&#039;. Leave this field empty (or at its default &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039; value) to export &#039;&#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039;&#039; entries from selected Glossary or Category. This option can be useful for exporting a limited number of entries from very large glossaries.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Select question type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
##&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Short answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; When you select this type, a Case sensitivity drop-down list is displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Case insensitive&#039;&#039;. Student responses will be accepted as correct regardless of the original glossary entry concept case (upper-case or lower-case). Example: original entry &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;. Accepted correct responses: &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;moodle&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Case sensitive. Student responses will be only be accepted as correct it the case of the original glossary entry concept is used. Example: original entry &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;. Accepted correct response: &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Multiple choice&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; questions will consist of the following elements: &#039;&#039;question text&#039;&#039; = glossary entry definition; &#039;&#039;correct answer&#039;&#039; = glossary entry concept; &#039;&#039;distracters&#039;&#039; = 2 (or more) glossary entry concepts randomly selected from the glossary (or glossary category) that you have selected. When you select this type, 3 drop-down lists get displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Number of choices&#039;&#039;. Select the number of total choices/answers you want to make available to the student (this number includes the correct answer plus the distracters).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Number the choices&#039;&#039; Select your preferred numbering style for the choices..&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Shuffle within questions&#039;  Select whether the answers will be shuffled.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Matching&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; questions will consist of a number of concepts and definitions which the student will have to match. A standard text of instructions will be added to the question: &#039;Match the definitions and the concepts&#039;. When you select this type, 2 drop-down lists get displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Number of choices&#039;&#039;. Select the number of pairs you want to make available for matching.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Shuffle within questions&#039;  Select whether the answers will be shuffled.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Drag and drop into text&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; questions will consist of a number of definitions which the student will have to complete by dragging &amp;amp; dropping the concepts into blanks. A standard text of instructions will be added to the question: &#039;Drag each concept label to match its definition&#039;. When you select this type, 2 drop-down lists get displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Number of choices&#039;&#039;. Select the number of articles you want to make available for each question.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Shuffle within questions&#039;  Select whether the answers will be shuffled.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## If the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Gapfill&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question type is installed on your moodle site, it will appear as an option in the -- Select question type -- drop-down list. If you select the Gapfill question type, one more drop-down list will be displayed, where you can choose from the 3 display modes for Gapfill: gapfill, dragdrop or dropdown. If you select the gapfill or the dragdrop modes, you&#039;ll have a further option of fixed gap size. See the [[Gapfill_question_type|Gapfill question documentation]] for more info.&lt;br /&gt;
## If the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Guessit&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question type is installed on your moodle site, the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle: guess a word&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in the -- Select question type -- drop-down list. You can only import from a Glossary that &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; option. 2 options will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
### Maximum number of tries&lt;br /&gt;
### Number of letters in wordle&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Save changes&#039;&#039;&#039; Upon saving the form validation check may throw out a message warning you that the number of entries or of choices you entered are incorrect. Please amend as needed before re-saving!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exporting the selected entries as questions to a moodle Questions XML file ==&lt;br /&gt;
# You are back in the course homepage, but now the block displays the settings you have selected.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Export n entries and create n questions&#039;&#039;&#039; link.&lt;br /&gt;
# Now you are on page Your course -&amp;gt; Glossaries -&amp;gt; [glosssary name] -&amp;gt; Glossary -&amp;gt; Export entries to Quiz (XML)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the Export button.&lt;br /&gt;
# At the prompt, save file to your computer. Its named after this pattern: &#039;&#039;&#039;[glosssary name] [QUESTIONTYPE (abbreviated)] questions.xml&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Return to course button/link. You see that the Export Glossary to Quiz block has been reset.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Import to the quiz questions bank==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In Administration block, click Questions to go to the Questions bank&lt;br /&gt;
# On the Edit questions page, Click the Import tab&lt;br /&gt;
# Set these settings:&lt;br /&gt;
## File format : Moodle XML format&lt;br /&gt;
## General&lt;br /&gt;
## Category Default&lt;br /&gt;
## Get category from file (check it)&lt;br /&gt;
# Import from file upload...&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the file you saved to your computer and click Upload this file button.&lt;br /&gt;
# If all goes well, the imported questions should get displayed on the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Continue.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the next page, the Question bank displays the new category name (formed on the name of the exported Glossary, plus the name of its category if you selected one of the glossary&#039;s categories) and of course all the questions that were imported&lt;br /&gt;
# You can now use these questions in a quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Block]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Exporter un glossaire vers un Test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Exportación de glosario a examen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Glossary_export_to_quiz&amp;diff=153118</id>
		<title>Glossary export to quiz</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Glossary_export_to_quiz&amp;diff=153118"/>
		<updated>2025-05-23T20:36:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Configuring an Export Glossary to Quiz block */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = Block&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=block_glossary_export_to_quiz&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/rezeau/moodle-block_glossary_export_to_quiz/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=162866&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[User:Joseph Rézeau|Joseph Rézeau]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information see [[Installing plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
A block to export a Glossary&#039;s entries to the Quiz Questions bank. Exports concepts &amp;amp; definitions to &#039;&#039;&#039;Short answer&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Multiple choice&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Matching&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;Drag and drop into text&#039;&#039;&#039; questions. Starting with the Moodle 3.6 version, it is also possible to export entries to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Gapfill&#039;&#039;&#039; contributed question type, if that plugin is installed on your Moodle site, of course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Export entries from Glossary to moodle quiz XML file==&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to access the block&#039;s configuration ===&lt;br /&gt;
After this block has been installed (by an Admin) on your Moodle site, it should be available to the site&#039;s users with a Teacher capability, in their own courses.&lt;br /&gt;
# As a teacher, go to your course&#039;s front page, Click on the main Actions icon to go into Edit mode and Turn editing on.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the side panel, click on Add a block. In the list which appears, click to select the Export Glossary to Quiz block.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Export Glossary to Quiz block gets displayed in your course&#039;s default block zone (depending on the current theme).&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the block&#039;s Action icon to configure the Export Glossary to Quiz block.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configuring an Export Glossary to Quiz block ===&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the drop-down list to &#039;&#039;&#039;select the glossary&#039;&#039;&#039; that you want to use to export its entries to the quiz questions bank. If that glossary contains categories, you can select one category to export its entries. To cancel your choice or to reset the block, simply leave that drop-down list on the Choose... position. Once a glossary has been selected, more options appear...&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Sorting Order&#039;&#039;&#039;. Use this setting to determine how the exported glossary entries will be ordered when you import them to your questions data bank. This can be used, in combination with the Maximum number of entries, for creating a quiz to test the latest entries to your glossary (especially a fairly large one).&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum number of entries to export&#039;&#039;&#039;. Leave this field empty (or at its default &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039; value) to export &#039;&#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039;&#039; entries from selected Glossary or Category. This option can be useful for exporting a limited number of entries from very large glossaries.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Select question type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
##&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Short answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; When you select this type, a Case sensitivity drop-down list is displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Case insensitive&#039;&#039;. Student responses will be accepted as correct regardless of the original glossary entry concept case (upper-case or lower-case). Example: original entry &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;. Accepted correct responses: &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;moodle&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Case sensitive. Student responses will be only be accepted as correct it the case of the original glossary entry concept is used. Example: original entry &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;. Accepted correct response: &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Multiple choice&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; questions will consist of the following elements: &#039;&#039;question text&#039;&#039; = glossary entry definition; &#039;&#039;correct answer&#039;&#039; = glossary entry concept; &#039;&#039;distracters&#039;&#039; = 2 (or more) glossary entry concepts randomly selected from the glossary (or glossary category) that you have selected. When you select this type, 3 drop-down lists get displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Number of choices&#039;&#039;. Select the number of total choices/answers you want to make available to the student (this number includes the correct answer plus the distracters).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Number the choices&#039;&#039; Select your preferred numbering style for the choices..&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Shuffle within questions&#039;  Select whether the answers will be shuffled.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Matching&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; questions will consist of a number of concepts and definitions which the student will have to match. A standard text of instructions will be added to the question: &#039;Match the definitions and the concepts&#039;. When you select this type, 2 drop-down lists get displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Number of choices&#039;&#039;. Select the number of pairs you want to make available for matching.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Shuffle within questions&#039;  Select whether the answers will be shuffled.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Drag and drop into text&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; questions will consist of a number of definitions which the student will have to complete by dragging &amp;amp; dropping the concepts into blanks. A standard text of instructions will be added to the question: &#039;Drag each concept label to match its definition&#039;. When you select this type, 2 drop-down lists get displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Number of choices&#039;&#039;. Select the number of articles you want to make available for each question.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Shuffle within questions&#039;  Select whether the answers will be shuffled.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## If the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Gapfill&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question type is installed on your moodle site, it will appear as an option in the -- Select question type -- drop-down list. If you select the Gapfill question type, one more drop-down list will be displayed, where you can choose from the 3 display modes for Gapfill: gapfill, dragdrop or dropdown. If you select the gapfill or the dragdrop modes, you&#039;ll have a further option of fixed gap size. See the [[Gapfill_question_type|Gapfill question documentation]] for more info.&lt;br /&gt;
## If the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Guessit&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question type is installed on your moodle site, the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle: guess a word&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; option in the -- Select question type -- drop-down list. You can only import from a Glossary that &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; option. 2 options will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
### Maximum number of tries&lt;br /&gt;
### Number of letters in wordle&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Save changes&#039;&#039;&#039; Upon saving the form validation check may throw out a message warning you that the number of entries or of choices you entered are incorrect. Please amend as needed before re-saving!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exporting the selected entries as questions to a moodle Questions XML file ==&lt;br /&gt;
# You are back in the course homepage, but now the block displays the settings you have selected.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Export n entries and create n questions&#039;&#039;&#039; link.&lt;br /&gt;
# Now you are on page Your course -&amp;gt; Glossaries -&amp;gt; [glosssary name] -&amp;gt; Glossary -&amp;gt; Export entries to Quiz (XML)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the Export button.&lt;br /&gt;
# At the prompt, save file to your computer. Its named after this pattern: &#039;&#039;&#039;[glosssary name] [QUESTIONTYPE (abbreviated)] questions.xml&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Return to course button/link. You see that the Export Glossary to Quiz block has been reset.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Import to the quiz questions bank==&lt;br /&gt;
# In Administration block, click Questions to go to the Questions bank&lt;br /&gt;
# On the Edit questions page, Click the Import tab&lt;br /&gt;
# Set these settings:&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;File format : Moodle XML format&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;General&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Category Default&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Get category from file (check it)&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Import from file upload...&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the file you saved to your computer and click Upload this file button.&lt;br /&gt;
# If all goes well, the imported questions should get displayed on the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Continue.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the next page, the Question bank displays the new category name (formed on the name of the exported Glossary, plus the name of its category if you selected one of the glossary&#039;s categories) and of course all the questions that were imported &lt;br /&gt;
# You can now use these questions in a quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Block]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Exporter un glossaire vers un Test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Exportación de glosario a examen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Glossary_export_to_quiz&amp;diff=153117</id>
		<title>Glossary export to quiz</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Glossary_export_to_quiz&amp;diff=153117"/>
		<updated>2025-05-23T20:34:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Configuring an Export Glossary to Quiz block */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = Block&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=block_glossary_export_to_quiz&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/rezeau/moodle-block_glossary_export_to_quiz/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=162866&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[User:Joseph Rézeau|Joseph Rézeau]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information see [[Installing plugins]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overview ==&lt;br /&gt;
A block to export a Glossary&#039;s entries to the Quiz Questions bank. Exports concepts &amp;amp; definitions to &#039;&#039;&#039;Short answer&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Multiple choice&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Matching&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;Drag and drop into text&#039;&#039;&#039; questions. Starting with the Moodle 3.6 version, it is also possible to export entries to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Gapfill&#039;&#039;&#039; contributed question type, if that plugin is installed on your Moodle site, of course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Export entries from Glossary to moodle quiz XML file==&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to access the block&#039;s configuration ===&lt;br /&gt;
After this block has been installed (by an Admin) on your Moodle site, it should be available to the site&#039;s users with a Teacher capability, in their own courses.&lt;br /&gt;
# As a teacher, go to your course&#039;s front page, Click on the main Actions icon to go into Edit mode and Turn editing on.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the side panel, click on Add a block. In the list which appears, click to select the Export Glossary to Quiz block.&lt;br /&gt;
# The Export Glossary to Quiz block gets displayed in your course&#039;s default block zone (depending on the current theme).&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the block&#039;s Action icon to configure the Export Glossary to Quiz block.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Configuring an Export Glossary to Quiz block ===&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the drop-down list to &#039;&#039;&#039;select the glossary&#039;&#039;&#039; that you want to use to export its entries to the quiz questions bank. If that glossary contains categories, you can select one category to export its entries. To cancel your choice or to reset the block, simply leave that drop-down list on the Choose... position. Once a glossary has been selected, more options appear...&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Sorting Order&#039;&#039;&#039;. Use this setting to determine how the exported glossary entries will be ordered when you import them to your questions data bank. This can be used, in combination with the Maximum number of entries, for creating a quiz to test the latest entries to your glossary (especially a fairly large one).&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum number of entries to export&#039;&#039;&#039;. Leave this field empty (or at its default &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039; value) to export &#039;&#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039;&#039; entries from selected Glossary or Category. This option can be useful for exporting a limited number of entries from very large glossaries.&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Select question type&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
##&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Short answer&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; When you select this type, a Case sensitivity drop-down list is displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Case insensitive&#039;&#039;. Student responses will be accepted as correct regardless of the original glossary entry concept case (upper-case or lower-case). Example: original entry &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;. Accepted correct responses: &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;moodle&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Case sensitive. Student responses will be only be accepted as correct it the case of the original glossary entry concept is used. Example: original entry &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;. Accepted correct response: &amp;quot;Moodle&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Multiple choice&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; questions will consist of the following elements: &#039;&#039;question text&#039;&#039; = glossary entry definition; &#039;&#039;correct answer&#039;&#039; = glossary entry concept; &#039;&#039;distracters&#039;&#039; = 2 (or more) glossary entry concepts randomly selected from the glossary (or glossary category) that you have selected. When you select this type, 3 drop-down lists get displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Number of choices&#039;&#039;. Select the number of total choices/answers you want to make available to the student (this number includes the correct answer plus the distracters).&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Number the choices&#039;&#039; Select your preferred numbering style for the choices..&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Shuffle within questions&#039;  Select whether the answers will be shuffled.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Matching&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; questions will consist of a number of concepts and definitions which the student will have to match. A standard text of instructions will be added to the question: &#039;Match the definitions and the concepts&#039;. When you select this type, 2 drop-down lists get displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Number of choices&#039;&#039;. Select the number of pairs you want to make available for matching.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Shuffle within questions&#039;  Select whether the answers will be shuffled.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Drag and drop into text&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; questions will consist of a number of definitions which the student will have to complete by dragging &amp;amp; dropping the concepts into blanks. A standard text of instructions will be added to the question: &#039;Drag each concept label to match its definition&#039;. When you select this type, 2 drop-down lists get displayed. &amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt; &#039;&#039;Number of choices&#039;&#039;. Select the number of articles you want to make available for each question.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;Shuffle within questions&#039;  Select whether the answers will be shuffled.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## If the &#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;Gapfill&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039; question type is installed on your moodle site, it will appear as an option in the -- Select question type -- drop-down list. If you select the Gapfill question type, one more drop-down list will be displayed, where you can choose from the 3 display modes for Gapfill: gapfill, dragdrop or dropdown. If you select the gapfill or the dragdrop modes, you&#039;ll have a further option of fixed gap size. See the [[Gapfill_question_type|Gapfill question documentation]] for more info.&lt;br /&gt;
## If the Guessit question type is installed on your moodle site, the Wordle: guess a word option in the -- Select question type -- drop-down list. You can only import from a Glossary that Wordle option. 2 options will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
### Maximum number of tries&lt;br /&gt;
### Number of letters in wordle&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;Save changes&#039;&#039;&#039; Upon saving the form validation check may throw out a message warning you that the number of entries or of choices you entered are incorrect. Please amend as needed before re-saving!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exporting the selected entries as questions to a moodle Questions XML file ==&lt;br /&gt;
# You are back in the course homepage, but now the block displays the settings you have selected.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the &#039;&#039;&#039;Export n entries and create n questions&#039;&#039;&#039; link.&lt;br /&gt;
# Now you are on page Your course -&amp;gt; Glossaries -&amp;gt; [glosssary name] -&amp;gt; Glossary -&amp;gt; Export entries to Quiz (XML)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on the Export button.&lt;br /&gt;
# At the prompt, save file to your computer. Its named after this pattern: &#039;&#039;&#039;[glosssary name] [QUESTIONTYPE (abbreviated)] questions.xml&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Return to course button/link. You see that the Export Glossary to Quiz block has been reset.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Import to the quiz questions bank==&lt;br /&gt;
# In Administration block, click Questions to go to the Questions bank&lt;br /&gt;
# On the Edit questions page, Click the Import tab&lt;br /&gt;
# Set these settings:&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;File format : Moodle XML format&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;General&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Category Default&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Get category from file (check it)&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Import from file upload...&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the file you saved to your computer and click Upload this file button.&lt;br /&gt;
# If all goes well, the imported questions should get displayed on the next screen.&lt;br /&gt;
# Click Continue.&lt;br /&gt;
# On the next page, the Question bank displays the new category name (formed on the name of the exported Glossary, plus the name of its category if you selected one of the glossary&#039;s categories) and of course all the questions that were imported &lt;br /&gt;
# You can now use these questions in a quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Block]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Exporter un glossaire vers un Test]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Exportación de glosario a examen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=152862</id>
		<title>GIFT guessit format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=152862"/>
		<updated>2025-05-11T21:03:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Question format examples */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;For general info about GIFT see the documentation at [[GIFT format]]. For information about the Guess It question type see the documentation at [[Guess it question type|Guess It question type]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specific GIFT guessit format plugin allows you to use a text editor to write &#039;&#039;[[Guess it question type|Guess It]]&#039;&#039; questions in a simple format that can be &#039;&#039;imported&#039;&#039; into your Moodle question bank. It can only be used if the &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; question type is already installed on your Moodle site, of course.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gift guessit format 01.jpg|none|frame|Import screenshot 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If both qtype_guessit and qformat_gift_guessit plugins have been installed on your Moodle site, when going to the Question Bank and selecting Import you should be able to select the GIFT to guessit format option as shown above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Question format examples===&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of a demonstration text file containing most of the accepted questions GIFT formatting.&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q0 This gift_guessit file contains various possible cases of formattings with no errors and a category.&lt;br /&gt;
 $CATEGORY: All guessit and wordle cases&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q1 guessit full params with 8 tries before help etc.&lt;br /&gt;
 ::English Proverb 01::In Egypt they say &amp;quot;Two captains on the ship will sink it.&amp;quot;{Too many cooks spoil the broth.[8]####When there are too many people trying to lead and give their opinions, it&#039;s confusing and leads to bad results. Jobs and projects should have one or two strong leaders.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q2 wordle minimal will detect single word (which must be capitalised)&lt;br /&gt;
 {WHISKY}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q3 wordle with no question name but with instructions (definition)&lt;br /&gt;
 A group of manuscript pages stitched together on one side to form a book; as opposed to pages sewn together on both sides to form a continuous scroll that had to be rolled up for storage and unrolled to be read.{CODEX}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q4 wordle with 8 maxtries and URL link in the feedback&lt;br /&gt;
 ::name pizza::Guess an Italian dish that’s cooked in a very hot oven{PIZZA[8]####Click to read more about &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;https://nomadparadise.com/italian-pizza/&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Italian pizzas&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q5 wordle no question name with 14 maxtries &lt;br /&gt;
 Guess an Italian type of dish{PASTA[14]####More than 600 different types of pasta exist from all regions of Italy.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q6 guessit minimal&lt;br /&gt;
 {A rolling stone gathers no moss.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q7 guessit no question name and uses default params&lt;br /&gt;
 Eating an apple a day will keep you healthy.{An apple a day keeps the doctor away.}&lt;br /&gt;
Q0 is not a real question but a category name. See explanations in the GIFT format doc here: [[GIFT format#Specifying Categories|Specifying Categories]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q1 is an example of a Guessit question where all the parameters are specified, as follows: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* // Comment (will not be imported to the questions bank)&lt;br /&gt;
* ::English Proverb 01::     Question title (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
* Question text (optional; becomes title if no title specified) . Actually, in the Guessit question type, the Question text field is used as a Description or Instructions field.&lt;br /&gt;
*{ ... Start answer. In the default Guess It option, the &amp;quot;answer&amp;quot; consists of a short sentence which the student will have to guess; in the Wordle option, the answer consists of a single word, which must be in CAPITAL LETTERS and no diacritics. The qformat_gift_guessit will automatically detect the number of words in the {answer} and decide on which option will be used (Guess It default or Wordle option).&lt;br /&gt;
*[8] This (optional) parameter between square brackets contains either the Number of tries before getting help (for the Guess It option) or the Maximum number of tries before the solution is given (for the Wordle option). If this parameter is not provided, the default value [10] will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*####Feedback text (optional) if preceded by 4 # characters.&lt;br /&gt;
*... } End answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q2 is an example of a question with the Wordle option as answer. No parameters are provided, no feedback, default Maximum number of tries [10] will be used. Because no Question text or Question title are provided, the Wordle answer {WHISKY} will be used for the question title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the other examples provided above it is clear that you can easily create text files with minimal parameters if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Import error messages===&lt;br /&gt;
Like all GIFT import files, respecting the format syntax is essential for correct import process. The qformat_gift_guessit plugin provides a number of &#039;&#039;ad hoc&#039;&#039; error messages to help the end-user detect syntax errors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For demonstration purposes a text file has been created with lots of syntax errors and imported into the question bank using qformat_gift_guessit. &lt;br /&gt;
 // No brackets: no word(s) to be guessed: no guessit gaps&lt;br /&gt;
 Too many cooks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Brackets do not match&lt;br /&gt;
 {My tailor is rich.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Brackets do not match&lt;br /&gt;
 My tailor is rich}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed :...::&lt;br /&gt;
 :Question 02::Find this cook{Too many cooks spoil the broth.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed in ::...:&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Question 03:The description{My tailor is rich.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed in :...:&lt;br /&gt;
 :Question 05:{My brother is not a girl.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed in ::...&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Question 06{My mum likes me.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit square brackets do not match&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Proverb::Description{My sister is not a boy.[6}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit nbtries error&lt;br /&gt;
 {My tailor is very rich.[9]}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit minimal params (correct)&lt;br /&gt;
 {A rolling stone gathers no moss.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit full params (correct) At least one correct question is needed for behat test to work.&lt;br /&gt;
 ::English Proverb 01::When there are too many people...{Too many cooks spoil the broth.}&lt;br /&gt;
The error messages are self-explanatory and are followed by the full text of the Guess It question to be imported (highlighted in yellow on this screenshot).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gift guessit format Screenshot of import errors.png|none|frame|Screenshot of import errors]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Formato GIFT guessit]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Format GIFT Devinette]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=152861</id>
		<title>GIFT guessit format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=152861"/>
		<updated>2025-05-11T16:10:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: added French link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;For general info about GIFT see the documentation at [[GIFT format]]. For information about the Guess It question type see the documentation at [[Guess it question type|Guess It question type]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specific GIFT guessit format plugin allows you to use a text editor to write &#039;&#039;[[Guess it question type|Guess It]]&#039;&#039; questions in a simple format that can be &#039;&#039;imported&#039;&#039; into your Moodle question bank. It can only be used if the &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; question type is already installed on your Moodle site, of course.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gift guessit format 01.jpg|none|frame|Import screenshot 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If both qtype_guessit and qformat_gift_guessit plugins have been installed on your Moodle site, when going to the Question Bank and selecting Import you should be able to select the GIFT to guessit format option as shown above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Question format examples===&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of a demonstration text file containing most of the accepted questions GIFT formatting.&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q0 This gift_guessit file contains various possible cases of formattings with no errors and a category.&lt;br /&gt;
 $CATEGORY: All guessit and wordle cases&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q1 guessit full params with 8 tries before help etc.&lt;br /&gt;
 ::English Proverb 01::In Egypt they say &amp;quot;Two captains on the ship will sink it.&amp;quot;{Too many cooks spoil the broth.[8]####When there are too many people trying to lead and give their opinions, it&#039;s confusing and leads to bad results. Jobs and projects should have one or two strong leaders.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q2 wordle minimal will detect single word (which must be capitalised)&lt;br /&gt;
 {WHISKY}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q3 wordle with no question name but with instructions (definition)&lt;br /&gt;
 A group of manuscript pages stitched together on one side to form a book; as opposed to pages sewn together on both sides to form a continuous scroll that had to be rolled up for storage and unrolled to be read.{CODEX}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q4 wordle with 5 maxtries and URL link in the feedback&lt;br /&gt;
 ::name pizza::Guess an Italian dish that’s cooked in a very hot oven{PIZZA[8]####Click to read more about &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;https://nomadparadise.com/italian-pizza/&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Italian pizzas&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q5 wordle no question name with 14 maxtries &lt;br /&gt;
 Guess an Italian type of dish{PASTA[14]####More than 600 different types of pasta exist from all regions of Italy.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q6 guessit minimal&lt;br /&gt;
 {A rolling stone gathers no moss.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q7 guessit no question name and uses default params&lt;br /&gt;
 Eating an apple a day will keep you healthy.{An apple a day keeps the doctor away.}&lt;br /&gt;
Q0 is not a real question but a category name. See explanations in the GIFT format doc here: [[GIFT format#Specifying Categories|Specifying Categories]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q1 is an example of a Guessit question where all the parameters are specified, as follows: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* // Comment (will not be imported to the questions bank)&lt;br /&gt;
* ::English Proverb 01::     Question title (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
* Question text (optional; becomes title if no title specified) . Actually, in the Guessit question type, the Question text field is used as a Description or Instructions field.&lt;br /&gt;
*{ ... Start answer. In the default Guess It option, the &amp;quot;answer&amp;quot; consists of a short sentence which the student will have to guess; in the Wordle option, the answer consists of a single word, which must be in CAPITAL LETTERS and no diacritics. The qformat_gift_guessit will automatically detect the number of words in the {answer} and decide on which option will be used (Guess It default or Wordle option).&lt;br /&gt;
*[8] This (optional) parameter between square brackets contains either the Number of tries before getting help (for the Guess It option) or the Maximum number of tries before the solution is given (for the Wordle option). If this parameter is not provided, the default value [10] will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*####Feedback text (optional) if preceded by 4 # characters.&lt;br /&gt;
*... } End answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q2 is an example of a question with the Wordle option as answer. No parameters are provided, no feedback, default Maximum number of tries [10] will be used. Because no Question text or Question title are provided, the Wordle answer {WHISKY} will be used for the question title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the other examples provided above it is clear that you can easily create text files with minimal parameters if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Import error messages===&lt;br /&gt;
Like all GIFT import files, respecting the format syntax is essential for correct import process. The qformat_gift_guessit plugin provides a number of &#039;&#039;ad hoc&#039;&#039; error messages to help the end-user detect syntax errors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For demonstration purposes a text file has been created with lots of syntax errors and imported into the question bank using qformat_gift_guessit. &lt;br /&gt;
 // No brackets: no word(s) to be guessed: no guessit gaps&lt;br /&gt;
 Too many cooks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Brackets do not match&lt;br /&gt;
 {My tailor is rich.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Brackets do not match&lt;br /&gt;
 My tailor is rich}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed :...::&lt;br /&gt;
 :Question 02::Find this cook{Too many cooks spoil the broth.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed in ::...:&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Question 03:The description{My tailor is rich.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed in :...:&lt;br /&gt;
 :Question 05:{My brother is not a girl.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed in ::...&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Question 06{My mum likes me.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit square brackets do not match&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Proverb::Description{My sister is not a boy.[6}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit nbtries error&lt;br /&gt;
 {My tailor is very rich.[9]}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit minimal params (correct)&lt;br /&gt;
 {A rolling stone gathers no moss.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit full params (correct) At least one correct question is needed for behat test to work.&lt;br /&gt;
 ::English Proverb 01::When there are too many people...{Too many cooks spoil the broth.}&lt;br /&gt;
The error messages are self-explanatory and are followed by the full text of the Guess It question to be imported (highlighted in yellow on this screenshot).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gift guessit format Screenshot of import errors.png|none|frame|Screenshot of import errors]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Formato GIFT guessit]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Format GIFT Devinette]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=152860</id>
		<title>GIFT guessit format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=152860"/>
		<updated>2025-05-11T15:47:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;For general info about GIFT see the documentation at [[GIFT format]]. For information about the Guess It question type see the documentation at [[Guess it question type|Guess It question type]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specific GIFT guessit format plugin allows you to use a text editor to write &#039;&#039;[[Guess it question type|Guess It]]&#039;&#039; questions in a simple format that can be &#039;&#039;imported&#039;&#039; into your Moodle question bank. It can only be used if the &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; question type is already installed on your Moodle site, of course.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gift guessit format 01.jpg|none|frame|Import screenshot 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If both qtype_guessit and qformat_gift_guessit plugins have been installed on your Moodle site, when going to the Question Bank and selecting Import you should be able to select the GIFT to guessit format option as shown above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Question format examples===&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of a demonstration text file containing most of the accepted questions GIFT formatting.&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q0 This gift_guessit file contains various possible cases of formattings with no errors and a category.&lt;br /&gt;
 $CATEGORY: All guessit and wordle cases&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q1 guessit full params with 8 tries before help etc.&lt;br /&gt;
 ::English Proverb 01::In Egypt they say &amp;quot;Two captains on the ship will sink it.&amp;quot;{Too many cooks spoil the broth.[8]####When there are too many people trying to lead and give their opinions, it&#039;s confusing and leads to bad results. Jobs and projects should have one or two strong leaders.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q2 wordle minimal will detect single word (which must be capitalised)&lt;br /&gt;
 {WHISKY}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q3 wordle with no question name but with instructions (definition)&lt;br /&gt;
 A group of manuscript pages stitched together on one side to form a book; as opposed to pages sewn together on both sides to form a continuous scroll that had to be rolled up for storage and unrolled to be read.{CODEX}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q4 wordle with 5 maxtries and URL link in the feedback&lt;br /&gt;
 ::name pizza::Guess an Italian dish that’s cooked in a very hot oven{PIZZA[8]####Click to read more about &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;https://nomadparadise.com/italian-pizza/&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Italian pizzas&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q5 wordle no question name with 14 maxtries &lt;br /&gt;
 Guess an Italian type of dish{PASTA[14]####More than 600 different types of pasta exist from all regions of Italy.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q6 guessit minimal&lt;br /&gt;
 {A rolling stone gathers no moss.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q7 guessit no question name and uses default params&lt;br /&gt;
 Eating an apple a day will keep you healthy.{An apple a day keeps the doctor away.}&lt;br /&gt;
Q0 is not a real question but a category name. See explanations in the GIFT format doc here: [[GIFT format#Specifying Categories|Specifying Categories]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q1 is an example of a Guessit question where all the parameters are specified, as follows: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* // Comment (will not be imported to the questions bank)&lt;br /&gt;
* ::English Proverb 01::     Question title (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
* Question text (optional; becomes title if no title specified) . Actually, in the Guessit question type, the Question text field is used as a Description or Instructions field.&lt;br /&gt;
*{ ... Start answer. In the default Guess It option, the &amp;quot;answer&amp;quot; consists of a short sentence which the student will have to guess; in the Wordle option, the answer consists of a single word, which must be in CAPITAL LETTERS and no diacritics. The qformat_gift_guessit will automatically detect the number of words in the {answer} and decide on which option will be used (Guess It default or Wordle option).&lt;br /&gt;
*[8] This (optional) parameter between square brackets contains either the Number of tries before getting help (for the Guess It option) or the Maximum number of tries before the solution is given (for the Wordle option). If this parameter is not provided, the default value [10] will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*####Feedback text (optional) if preceded by 4 # characters.&lt;br /&gt;
*... } End answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q2 is an example of a question with the Wordle option as answer. No parameters are provided, no feedback, default Maximum number of tries [10] will be used. Because no Question text or Question title are provided, the Wordle answer {WHISKY} will be used for the question title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the other examples provided above it is clear that you can easily create text files with minimal parameters if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Import error messages===&lt;br /&gt;
Like all GIFT import files, respecting the format syntax is essential for correct import process. The qformat_gift_guessit plugin provides a number of &#039;&#039;ad hoc&#039;&#039; error messages to help the end-user detect syntax errors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For demonstration purposes a text file has been created with lots of syntax errors and imported into the question bank using qformat_gift_guessit. &lt;br /&gt;
 // No brackets: no word(s) to be guessed: no guessit gaps&lt;br /&gt;
 Too many cooks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Brackets do not match&lt;br /&gt;
 {My tailor is rich.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Brackets do not match&lt;br /&gt;
 My tailor is rich}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed :...::&lt;br /&gt;
 :Question 02::Find this cook{Too many cooks spoil the broth.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed in ::...:&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Question 03:The description{My tailor is rich.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed in :...:&lt;br /&gt;
 :Question 05:{My brother is not a girl.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed in ::...&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Question 06{My mum likes me.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit square brackets do not match&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Proverb::Description{My sister is not a boy.[6}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit nbtries error&lt;br /&gt;
 {My tailor is very rich.[9]}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit minimal params (correct)&lt;br /&gt;
 {A rolling stone gathers no moss.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit full params (correct) At least one correct question is needed for behat test to work.&lt;br /&gt;
 ::English Proverb 01::When there are too many people...{Too many cooks spoil the broth.}&lt;br /&gt;
The error messages are self-explanatory and are followed by the full text of the Guess It question to be imported (highlighted in yellow on this screenshot).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gift guessit format Screenshot of import errors.png|none|frame|Screenshot of import errors]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Formato GIFT guessit]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=152797</id>
		<title>GIFT guessit format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=152797"/>
		<updated>2025-05-09T12:48:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;For general info about GIFT see the documentation at [[GIFT format]]. For information about the Guess It question type see the documentation at [[Guess it question type|Guess It question type]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specific GIFT guessit format plugin allows you to use a text editor to write &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; questions in a simple format that can be &#039;&#039;imported&#039;&#039; into your Moodle question bank. It can only be used if the &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; question type is already installed on your Moodle site, of course.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gift guessit format 01.jpg|none|frame|Import screenshot 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If both qtype_guessit and qformat_gift_guessit plugins have been installed on your Moodle site, when going to the Question Bank and selecting Import you should be able to select the GIFT to guessit format option as shown above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Question format examples===&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of a demonstration text file containing most of the accepted questions GIFT formatting.&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q0 This gift_guessit file contains various possible cases of formattings with no errors and a category.&lt;br /&gt;
 $CATEGORY: All guessit and wordle cases&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q1 guessit full params with 8 tries before help etc.&lt;br /&gt;
 ::English Proverb 01::In Egypt they say &amp;quot;Two captains on the ship will sink it.&amp;quot;{Too many cooks spoil the broth.[8]####When there are too many people trying to lead and give their opinions, it&#039;s confusing and leads to bad results. Jobs and projects should have one or two strong leaders.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q2 wordle minimal will detect single word (which must be capitalised)&lt;br /&gt;
 {WHISKY}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q3 wordle with no question name but with instructions (definition)&lt;br /&gt;
 A group of manuscript pages stitched together on one side to form a book; as opposed to pages sewn together on both sides to form a continuous scroll that had to be rolled up for storage and unrolled to be read.{CODEX}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q4 wordle with 5 maxtries and URL link in the feedback&lt;br /&gt;
 ::name pizza::Guess an Italian dish that’s cooked in a very hot oven{PIZZA[8]####Click to read more about &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;https://nomadparadise.com/italian-pizza/&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Italian pizzas&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q5 wordle no question name with 14 maxtries &lt;br /&gt;
 Guess an Italian type of dish{PASTA[14]####More than 600 different types of pasta exist from all regions of Italy.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q6 guessit minimal&lt;br /&gt;
 {A rolling stone gathers no moss.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q7 guessit no question name and uses default params&lt;br /&gt;
 Eating an apple a day will keep you healthy.{An apple a day keeps the doctor away.}&lt;br /&gt;
Q0 is not a real question but a category name. See explanations in the GIFT format doc here: [[GIFT format#Specifying Categories|Specifying Categories]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q1 is an example of a Guessit question where all the parameters are specified, as follows: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* // Comment (will not be imported to the questions bank)&lt;br /&gt;
* ::English Proverb 01::     Question title (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
* Question text (optional; becomes title if no title specified) . Actually, in the Guessit question type, the Question text field is used as a Description or Instructions field.&lt;br /&gt;
*{ ... Start answer. In the default Guess It option, the &amp;quot;answer&amp;quot; consists of a short sentence which the student will have to guess; in the Wordle option, the answer consists of a single word, which must be in CAPITAL LETTERS and no diacritics. The qformat_gift_guessit will automatically detect the number of words in the {answer} and decide on which option will be used (Guess It default or Wordle option).&lt;br /&gt;
*[8] This (optional) parameter between square brackets contains either the Number of tries before getting help (for the Guess It option) or the Maximum number of tries before the solution is given (for the Wordle option). If this parameter is not provided, the default value [10] will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*####Feedback text (optional) if preceded by 4 # characters.&lt;br /&gt;
*... } End answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q2 is an example of a question with the Wordle option as answer. No parameters are provided, no feedback, default Maximum number of tries [10] will be used. Because no Question text or Question title are provided, the Wordle answer {WHISKY} will be used for the question title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the other examples provided above it is clear that you can easily create text files with minimal parameters if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Import error messages===&lt;br /&gt;
Like all GIFT import files, respecting the format syntax is essential for correct import process. The qformat_gift_guessit plugin provides a number of &#039;&#039;ad hoc&#039;&#039; error messages to help the end-user detect syntax errors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For demonstration purposes a text file has been created with lots of syntax errors and imported into the question bank using qformat_gift_guessit. &lt;br /&gt;
 // No brackets: no word(s) to be guessed: no guessit gaps&lt;br /&gt;
 Too many cooks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Brackets do not match&lt;br /&gt;
 {My tailor is rich.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Brackets do not match&lt;br /&gt;
 My tailor is rich}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed :...::&lt;br /&gt;
 :Question 02::Find this cook{Too many cooks spoil the broth.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed in ::...:&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Question 03:The description{My tailor is rich.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed in :...:&lt;br /&gt;
 :Question 05:{My brother is not a girl.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed in ::...&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Question 06{My mum likes me.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit square brackets do not match&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Proverb::Description{My sister is not a boy.[6}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit nbtries error&lt;br /&gt;
 {My tailor is very rich.[9]}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit minimal params (correct)&lt;br /&gt;
 {A rolling stone gathers no moss.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit full params (correct) At least one correct question is needed for behat test to work.&lt;br /&gt;
 ::English Proverb 01::When there are too many people...{Too many cooks spoil the broth.}&lt;br /&gt;
The error messages are self-explanatory and are followed by the full text of the Guess It question to be imported (highlighted in yellow on this screenshot).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gift guessit format Screenshot of import errors.png|none|frame|Screenshot of import errors]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Formato GIFT guessit]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:gift_guessit_format_Screenshot_of_import_errors.png&amp;diff=152796</id>
		<title>File:gift guessit format Screenshot of import errors.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:gift_guessit_format_Screenshot_of_import_errors.png&amp;diff=152796"/>
		<updated>2025-05-09T12:48:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Screenshot of import errors&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=152795</id>
		<title>GIFT guessit format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=152795"/>
		<updated>2025-05-09T12:45:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;For general info about GIFT see the documentation at [[GIFT format]]. For information about the Guess It question type see the documentation at [[Guess it question type|Guess It question type]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specific GIFT guessit format plugin allows you to use a text editor to write &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; questions in a simple format that can be &#039;&#039;imported&#039;&#039; into your Moodle question bank. It can only be used if the &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; question type is already installed on your Moodle site, of course.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gift guessit format 01.jpg|none|frame|Import screenshot 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If both qtype_guessit and qformat_gift_guessit plugins have been installed on your Moodle site, when going to the Question Bank and selecting Import you should be able to select the GIFT to guessit format option as shown above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Question format examples===&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of a demonstration text file containing most of the accepted questions GIFT formatting.&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q0 This gift_guessit file contains various possible cases of formattings with no errors and a category.&lt;br /&gt;
 $CATEGORY: All guessit and wordle cases&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q1 guessit full params with 8 tries before help etc.&lt;br /&gt;
 ::English Proverb 01::In Egypt they say &amp;quot;Two captains on the ship will sink it.&amp;quot;{Too many cooks spoil the broth.[8]####When there are too many people trying to lead and give their opinions, it&#039;s confusing and leads to bad results. Jobs and projects should have one or two strong leaders.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q2 wordle minimal will detect single word (which must be capitalised)&lt;br /&gt;
 {WHISKY}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q3 wordle with no question name but with instructions (definition)&lt;br /&gt;
 A group of manuscript pages stitched together on one side to form a book; as opposed to pages sewn together on both sides to form a continuous scroll that had to be rolled up for storage and unrolled to be read.{CODEX}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q4 wordle with 5 maxtries and URL link in the feedback&lt;br /&gt;
 ::name pizza::Guess an Italian dish that’s cooked in a very hot oven{PIZZA[8]####Click to read more about &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;https://nomadparadise.com/italian-pizza/&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Italian pizzas&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q5 wordle no question name with 14 maxtries &lt;br /&gt;
 Guess an Italian type of dish{PASTA[14]####More than 600 different types of pasta exist from all regions of Italy.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q6 guessit minimal&lt;br /&gt;
 {A rolling stone gathers no moss.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q7 guessit no question name and uses default params&lt;br /&gt;
 Eating an apple a day will keep you healthy.{An apple a day keeps the doctor away.}&lt;br /&gt;
Q0 is not a real question but a category name. See explanations in the GIFT format doc here: [[GIFT format#Specifying Categories|Specifying Categories]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q1 is an example of a Guessit question where all the parameters are specified, as follows: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* // Comment (will not be imported to the questions bank)&lt;br /&gt;
* ::English Proverb 01::     Question title (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
* Question text (optional; becomes title if no title specified) . Actually, in the Guessit question type, the Question text field is used as a Description or Instructions field.&lt;br /&gt;
*{ ... Start answer. In the default Guess It option, the &amp;quot;answer&amp;quot; consists of a short sentence which the student will have to guess; in the Wordle option, the answer consists of a single word, which must be in CAPITAL LETTERS and no diacritics. The qformat_gift_guessit will automatically detect the number of words in the {answer} and decide on which option will be used (Guess It default or Wordle option).&lt;br /&gt;
*[8] This (optional) parameter between square brackets contains either the Number of tries before getting help (for the Guess It option) or the Maximum number of tries before the solution is given (for the Wordle option). If this parameter is not provided, the default value [10] will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
*####Feedback text (optional) if preceded by 4 # characters.&lt;br /&gt;
*... } End answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q2 is an example of a question with the Wordle option as answer. No parameters are provided, no feedback, default Maximum number of tries [10] will be used. Because no Question text or Question title are provided, the Wordle answer {WHISKY} will be used for the question title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the other examples provided above it is clear that you can easily create text files with minimal parameters if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Import error messages===&lt;br /&gt;
Like all GIFT import files, respecting the format syntax is essential for correct import process. The qformat_gift_guessit plugin provides a number of &#039;&#039;ad hoc&#039;&#039; error messages to help the end-user detect syntax errors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For demonstration purposes a text file has been created with lots of syntax errors and imported into the question bank using qformat_gift_guessit. &lt;br /&gt;
 // No brackets: no word(s) to be guessed: no guessit gaps&lt;br /&gt;
 Too many cooks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Brackets do not match&lt;br /&gt;
 {My tailor is rich.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Brackets do not match&lt;br /&gt;
 My tailor is rich}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed :...::&lt;br /&gt;
 :Question 02::Find this cook{Too many cooks spoil the broth.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed in ::...:&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Question 03:The description{My tailor is rich.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed in :...:&lt;br /&gt;
 :Question 05:{My brother is not a girl.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed in ::...&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Question 06{My mum likes me.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit square brackets do not match&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Proverb::Description{My sister is not a boy.[6}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit nbtries error&lt;br /&gt;
 {My tailor is very rich.[9]}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit minimal params (correct)&lt;br /&gt;
 {A rolling stone gathers no moss.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit full params (correct) At least one correct question is needed for behat test to work.&lt;br /&gt;
 ::English Proverb 01::When there are too many people...{Too many cooks spoil the broth.}&lt;br /&gt;
The error messages are self-explanatory and are followed by the full text of the Guess It question to be imported (highlighted in yellow on this screenshot).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot of import errors.png|none|frame|Screenshot of import errors]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Formato GIFT guessit]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:gift_guessit_format_01.jpg&amp;diff=152794</id>
		<title>File:gift guessit format 01.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:gift_guessit_format_01.jpg&amp;diff=152794"/>
		<updated>2025-05-09T12:45:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Import screenshot 1&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=152793</id>
		<title>GIFT guessit format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=152793"/>
		<updated>2025-05-09T12:30:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;For general info about GIFT see the documentation at [[GIFT format]]. For information about the Guess It question type see the documentation at [[Guess it question type|Guess It question type]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specific GIFT guessit format plugin allows you to use a text editor to write &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; questions in a simple format that can be &#039;&#039;imported&#039;&#039; into your Moodle question bank. It can only be used if the &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; question type is already installed on your Moodle site, of course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2025-03-31 16-14-44.jpg|none|frame|Import screenshot 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
If both qtype_guessit and qformat_gift_guessit plugins have been installed on your Moodle site, when going to the Question Bank and selecting Import you should be able to select the GIFT to guessit format option as shown above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Question format examples ===&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of a demonstration text file containing most of the accepted questions GIFT formatting.&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q0 This gift_guessit file contains various possible cases of formattings with no errors and a category.&lt;br /&gt;
 $CATEGORY: All guessit and wordle cases&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q1 guessit full params with 8 tries before help etc.&lt;br /&gt;
 ::English Proverb 01::In Egypt they say &amp;quot;Two captains on the ship will sink it.&amp;quot;{Too many cooks spoil the broth.[8]####When there are too many people trying to lead and give their opinions, it&#039;s confusing and leads to bad results. Jobs and projects should have one or two strong leaders.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q2 wordle minimal will detect single word (which must be capitalised)&lt;br /&gt;
 {WHISKY}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q3 wordle with no question name but with instructions (definition)&lt;br /&gt;
 A group of manuscript pages stitched together on one side to form a book; as opposed to pages sewn together on both sides to form a continuous scroll that had to be rolled up for storage and unrolled to be read.{CODEX}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q4 wordle with 5 maxtries and URL link in the feedback&lt;br /&gt;
 ::name pizza::Guess an Italian dish that’s cooked in a very hot oven{PIZZA[8]####Click to read more about &amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;https://nomadparadise.com/italian-pizza/&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Italian pizzas&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q5 wordle no question name with 14 maxtries &lt;br /&gt;
 Guess an Italian type of dish{PASTA[14]####More than 600 different types of pasta exist from all regions of Italy.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q6 guessit minimal&lt;br /&gt;
 {A rolling stone gathers no moss.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Q7 guessit no question name and uses default params&lt;br /&gt;
 Eating an apple a day will keep you healthy.{An apple a day keeps the doctor away.}&lt;br /&gt;
Q0 is not a real question but a category name. See explanations in the GIFT format doc here: [[GIFT format#Specifying Categories|Specifying Categories]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q1 is an example of a Guessit question where all the parameters are specified, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* // Comment (will not be imported to the questions bank)&lt;br /&gt;
* ::English Proverb 01::     Question title (optional)&lt;br /&gt;
* Question text (optional; becomes title if no title specified) . Actually, in the Guessit question type, the Question text field is used as a Description or Instructions field.&lt;br /&gt;
* { ... Start answer. In the default Guess It option, the &amp;quot;answer&amp;quot; consists of a short sentence which the student will have to guess; in the Wordle option, the answer consists of a single word, which must be in CAPITAL LETTERS and no diacritics. The qformat_gift_guessit will automatically detect the number of words in the {answer} and decide on which option will be used (Guess It default or Wordle option).&lt;br /&gt;
* [8] This (optional) parameter between square brackets contains either the Number of tries before getting help (for the Guess It option) or the Maximum number of tries before the solution is given (for the Wordle option). If this parameter is not provided, the default value [10] will be used.&lt;br /&gt;
* ####Feedback text (optional) if preceded by 4 # characters.&lt;br /&gt;
* ... } End answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Q2 is an example of a question with the Wordle option as answer. No parameters are provided, no feedback, default Maximum number of tries [10] will be used. Because no Question text or Question title are provided, the Wordle answer {WHISKY} will be used for the question title.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the other examples provided above it is clear that you can easily create text files with minimal parameters if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Import error messages ===&lt;br /&gt;
Like all GIFT import files, respecting the format syntax is essential for correct import process. The qformat_gift_guessit plugin provides a number of &#039;&#039;ad hoc&#039;&#039; error messages to help the end-user detect syntax errors.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For demonstration purposes a text file has been created with lots of syntax errors and imported into the question bank using qformat_gift_guessit. &lt;br /&gt;
 // No brackets: no word(s) to be guessed: no guessit gaps&lt;br /&gt;
 Too many cooks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Brackets do not match&lt;br /&gt;
 {My tailor is rich.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Brackets do not match&lt;br /&gt;
 My tailor is rich}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed :...::&lt;br /&gt;
 :Question 02::Find this cook{Too many cooks spoil the broth.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed in ::...:&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Question 03:The description{My tailor is rich.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed in :...:&lt;br /&gt;
 :Question 05:{My brother is not a girl.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // Question name not correctly enclosed in ::...&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Question 06{My mum likes me.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit square brackets do not match&lt;br /&gt;
 ::Proverb::Description{My sister is not a boy.[6}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit nbtries error&lt;br /&gt;
 {My tailor is very rich.[9]}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit minimal params (correct)&lt;br /&gt;
 {A rolling stone gathers no moss.}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 // guessit full params (correct) At least one correct question is needed for behat test to work.&lt;br /&gt;
 ::English Proverb 01::When there are too many people...{Too many cooks spoil the broth.}&lt;br /&gt;
The error messages are self-explanatory and are followed by the full text of the Guess It question to be imported (highlighted in yellow on this screenshot).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot of import errors.png|none|frame|Screenshot of import errors]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Formato GIFT guessit]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=152792</id>
		<title>Guess it question type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=152792"/>
		<updated>2025-05-09T12:29:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = question type&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/rezeau/moodle-qtype_guessit/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[user:Joseph Rézeau|Joseph Rezeau]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installing this question type==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the generic [[Installing plugins]] documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Guess It Question Type ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== History ===&lt;br /&gt;
Guess It  is an adaptation of a language game to be played on paper or on a classroom blackboard, dating back to the 1970s. It was one of the very first games I programmed on my [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Commodore_64 Commodore 64] in the mid 1980s.&lt;br /&gt;
I adapted Guess It to H5P a few years ago and it is still available on my Moodle/H5P test site [https://moodle/mod/page/view.php?id=34 here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rationale ===&lt;br /&gt;
The player (student) has to guess a &amp;quot;mystery sentence&amp;quot;, word by word. Each word entered by the student is compared letter by letter with the word to be guessed, starting from the beginning of the word. If a guessed letter matches the original letter, upon checking the answer, that letter is underlined with the equal sign (&#039;&#039;&#039;=&#039;&#039;&#039;). If the original letter&#039;s rank in the alphabet is situated &#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039; the letter typed by the student, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign (look before). And in the opposite case, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; (look after) sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The difficulty of the exercise resides in a number of factors. It is easier to guess a sentence which has been recently memorised in class or a well-known saying or proverb or a verse from the lyrics of a well-known song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a Guess It Question ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:adding guessit question-02.jpg|alt=adding guessit question screenshot|none|frame|adding guessit question screenshot]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Question name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter any name that is useful for organising your Questions; this name will not be displayed to the students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Instructions&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although this field shows the Required icon, it is in fact optional. Use this field to display any information that would help the student answer the question. All kind of text and media are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle option: Guess a word&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option will be explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Guessit word(s)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the field where you type the sentence that the student will have to guess, word by word. If you enter capitals and punctuation, they will be required for a correct answer, but help will be provided if they are missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the number of tries needed before the Help option becomes available. &#039;&#039;Never&#039;&#039; means that Help will never be available. Range available: Never, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the sentence to be guessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General feedback&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this in the same way as you would for any question type. Optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example scenario ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try0.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0.- Upon entering the game, the player is presented with a number of empty gaps corresponding to the number of words in the mysterious sentence.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1a.- Words are entered one by one in the provided gaps and you navigate to the next gap by pressing either the Tab or the Space keys. If needed, the size of gap #4 will &amp;quot;grow&amp;quot; to accommodate the word &amp;quot;favourite&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1b.- When Check is pressed, specific feedback is provided in the &amp;quot;feedback&amp;quot; zone as follows: Gap 1 shows that the first word of the sentence should start with a capital letter. The yellow background tells that the word entered is partially correct. Gap 2 shows that the 2nd word has been correctly guessed, and the word is displayed on a green background. The words in gaps 3 to 4 are on a red (incorrect) background. For each partially or incorrect word in the answer, marks are displayed just under the first letter, showing whether the letter to be found is located after (&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) or before (the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) the letter entered, in the alphabet. The letter &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; is simply given.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2a. The player has entered &amp;quot;Spring is a lovely period&amp;quot;, taking care to enter words whose first letter matches the &amp;lt; or &amp;gt; marks previously given in the specific feedback. Note that when new words are entered in the incorrectly marked gaps (red background) their background is reset to white until Check is pressed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2b. Specific feedback is provided again. Note that specific back displayed in the &amp;quot;feedback zone&amp;quot; is added for each successive try and numbered. This is especially helpful for incorrect words. In the example above, the player now knows that the word in Gap 3 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; and before &amp;quot;m&amp;quot; in the alphabet; the word in Gap 4 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;l&amp;quot; and the word in Gap 5 begins with a letter before &amp;quot;p&amp;quot;. Before attempting a new try at guessing the incorrect words, the player decides to get some help by clicking on the Get help button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2c.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2c.- Since in the question Options we set &#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039; to 6, a relevant message is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.- 6a-. And the scenario continues, with each new try adding its own specific feedback to the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6a.- The student clicks on Get help, after the required set number of tries has been reached...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6b. The last missing word is given. Note that the final full stop is also given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try7.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.- Finished! The navigation box at the top left shows Question 1 Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Wordle option ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle_edit01.jpg|none|frame|Word error]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the default Guess It question type, the student/player has to guess a sentence made up of several words. If the Wordle Option is selected in the edit form, then they have to guess a single word. This is based on a recently popular word game, see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wordle Wikipedia article]. In this Guess It question type, Wordle can use any length of words between 4 and 8, but the recommended default is 5 letters only. One limitation is that only CAPITAL LETTERS can be used, and no diacritics (accents). The above screen shows the ad hoc ERROR message displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle edit02b.jpg|none|frame|Fixed error]]&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended default number of tries is 10 but can be set at 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the word to be guessed. No help is provided other than the specific feedback colour scheme explained hereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 1 ===&lt;br /&gt;
For this scenario the word to be guesses is PIZZA and the maximum number of tries has been set to 6 (because this is a fairly common word, which should be guessed easily).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza0.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1]]&lt;br /&gt;
1.- The Wordle option only accepts UPPERCASE letters. If the player enters lowercase letters, they are automatically converted to uppercase. Each time the player enters a letter, the focus is placed on the next gap. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1a]]&lt;br /&gt;
When the last gap has been reached, the focus is placed on the Check button and the player can submit their answer by pressing either the Space or the Tab keys.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza1.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #2]]&lt;br /&gt;
2.- Feedback is provided using the same colouring scheme as for the regular Guessit game. Green for a correctly placed letter; yellow for a letter which is in the word but not correctly placed and red for a letter not in the word. The feedback message shows the distribution of the letters and the number of tries left.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza2.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #3]]&lt;br /&gt;
3.- As for the regular Guessit game, the successive tries are displayed. Here the player has correctly guessed the first letter (P) but none of their other letters are part of the work.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza3.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #4]]&lt;br /&gt;
4.- Looking better... not much choice of Italian food left, so...&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza5.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #5]]&lt;br /&gt;
5.- When the word is found, the Check button disappears. And the Info box displays Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 2 ===&lt;br /&gt;
Word to find in 6 tries: TIGER&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger0a.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #0]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #01]]&lt;br /&gt;
[... More tries ...]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:screenshot 02.png|left|frame|Screenshot #02]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger05.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #05]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:screenshot final.png|alt=Wordle Final screenshot |none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
Since the max number of tries was set at 6, if the word in not found, it is &amp;quot;given&amp;quot;. Note that the current score is marked as Incorrect. The General Feedback message is displayed &amp;quot;A quite ferocious animal&amp;quot;. Under it, the Incorrect and Score 0/5 are displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing questions to the Guess It question type ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The GIFT to guessit format plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
The specific GIFT guessit format plugin allows you to use a text editor to write &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; questions in a simple format that can be &#039;&#039;imported&#039;&#039; into your Moodle question bank. This plugin is available in the Moodle plugins repository here: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://moodle.org/plugins/qformat_gift_guessit GIFT to guessit format plugin] and see the documentation here: [[GIFT guessit format|GIFT to guessit format documentation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The Glossary export to quiz plugin ===&lt;br /&gt;
You can use your Moodle site/course glossaries to export their concepts and definitions to the Guess It (Wordle option) question type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[https://moodle.org/plugins/block_glossary_export_to_quiz Glossary export to quiz plugin] and see the documentation here: [[Glossary_export_to_quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Question de type Devinette]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipo de pregunta Adivinanza]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=152791</id>
		<title>Guess it question type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=152791"/>
		<updated>2025-05-09T12:12:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Installing this question type */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = question type&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/rezeau/moodle-qtype_guessit/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[user:Joseph Rézeau|Joseph Rezeau]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installing this question type==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the generic [[Installing plugins]] documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Guess It Question Type ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== History ===&lt;br /&gt;
Guess It  is an adaptation of a language game to be played on paper or on a classroom blackboard, dating back to the 1970s. It was one of the very first games I programmed on my [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Commodore_64 Commodore 64] in the mid 1980s.&lt;br /&gt;
I adapted Guess It to H5P a few years ago and it is still available on my Moodle/H5P test site [https://moodle/mod/page/view.php?id=34 here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rationale ===&lt;br /&gt;
The player (student) has to guess a &amp;quot;mystery sentence&amp;quot;, word by word. Each word entered by the student is compared letter by letter with the word to be guessed, starting from the beginning of the word. If a guessed letter matches the original letter, upon checking the answer, that letter is underlined with the equal sign (&#039;&#039;&#039;=&#039;&#039;&#039;). If the original letter&#039;s rank in the alphabet is situated &#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039; the letter typed by the student, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign (look before). And in the opposite case, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; (look after) sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The difficulty of the exercise resides in a number of factors. It is easier to guess a sentence which has been recently memorised in class or a well-known saying or proverb or a verse from the lyrics of a well-known song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a Guess It Question ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:adding guessit question-02.jpg|alt=adding guessit question screenshot|none|frame|adding guessit question screenshot]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Question name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter any name that is useful for organising your Questions; this name will not be displayed to the students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Instructions&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although this field shows the Required icon, it is in fact optional. Use this field to display any information that would help the student answer the question. All kind of text and media are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle option: Guess a word&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option will be explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Guessit word(s)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the field where you type the sentence that the student will have to guess, word by word. If you enter capitals and punctuation, they will be required for a correct answer, but help will be provided if they are missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the number of tries needed before the Help option becomes available. &#039;&#039;Never&#039;&#039; means that Help will never be available. Range available: Never, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the sentence to be guessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General feedback&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this in the same way as you would for any question type. Optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example scenario ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try0.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0.- Upon entering the game, the player is presented with a number of empty gaps corresponding to the number of words in the mysterious sentence.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1a.- Words are entered one by one in the provided gaps and you navigate to the next gap by pressing either the Tab or the Space keys. If needed, the size of gap #4 will &amp;quot;grow&amp;quot; to accommodate the word &amp;quot;favourite&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1b.- When Check is pressed, specific feedback is provided in the &amp;quot;feedback&amp;quot; zone as follows: Gap 1 shows that the first word of the sentence should start with a capital letter. The yellow background tells that the word entered is partially correct. Gap 2 shows that the 2nd word has been correctly guessed, and the word is displayed on a green background. The words in gaps 3 to 4 are on a red (incorrect) background. For each partially or incorrect word in the answer, marks are displayed just under the first letter, showing whether the letter to be found is located after (&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) or before (the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) the letter entered, in the alphabet. The letter &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; is simply given.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2a. The player has entered &amp;quot;Spring is a lovely period&amp;quot;, taking care to enter words whose first letter matches the &amp;lt; or &amp;gt; marks previously given in the specific feedback. Note that when new words are entered in the incorrectly marked gaps (red background) their background is reset to white until Check is pressed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2b. Specific feedback is provided again. Note that specific back displayed in the &amp;quot;feedback zone&amp;quot; is added for each successive try and numbered. This is especially helpful for incorrect words. In the example above, the player now knows that the word in Gap 3 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; and before &amp;quot;m&amp;quot; in the alphabet; the word in Gap 4 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;l&amp;quot; and the word in Gap 5 begins with a letter before &amp;quot;p&amp;quot;. Before attempting a new try at guessing the incorrect words, the player decides to get some help by clicking on the Get help button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2c.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2c.- Since in the question Options we set &#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039; to 6, a relevant message is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.- 6a-. And the scenario continues, with each new try adding its own specific feedback to the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6a.- The student clicks on Get help, after the required set number of tries has been reached...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6b. The last missing word is given. Note that the final full stop is also given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try7.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.- Finished! The navigation box at the top left shows Question 1 Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Wordle option ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle_edit01.jpg|none|frame|Word error]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the default Guess It question type, the student/player has to guess a sentence made up of several words. If the Wordle Option is selected in the edit form, then they have to guess a single word. This is based on a recently popular word game, see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wordle Wikipedia article]. In this Guess It question type, Wordle can use any length of words between 4 and 8, but the recommended default is 5 letters only. One limitation is that only CAPITAL LETTERS can be used, and no diacritics (accents). The above screen shows the ad hoc ERROR message displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle edit02b.jpg|none|frame|Fixed error]]&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended default number of tries is 10 but can be set at 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the word to be guessed. No help is provided other than the specific feedback colour scheme explained hereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 1 ===&lt;br /&gt;
For this scenario the word to be guesses is PIZZA and the maximum number of tries has been set to 6 (because this is a fairly common word, which should be guessed easily).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza0.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1]]&lt;br /&gt;
1.- The Wordle option only accepts UPPERCASE letters. If the player enters lowercase letters, they are automatically converted to uppercase. Each time the player enters a letter, the focus is placed on the next gap. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1a]]&lt;br /&gt;
When the last gap has been reached, the focus is placed on the Check button and the player can submit their answer by pressing either the Space or the Tab keys.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza1.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #2]]&lt;br /&gt;
2.- Feedback is provided using the same colouring scheme as for the regular Guessit game. Green for a correctly placed letter; yellow for a letter which is in the word but not correctly placed and red for a letter not in the word. The feedback message shows the distribution of the letters and the number of tries left.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza2.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #3]]&lt;br /&gt;
3.- As for the regular Guessit game, the successive tries are displayed. Here the player has correctly guessed the first letter (P) but none of their other letters are part of the work.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza3.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #4]]&lt;br /&gt;
4.- Looking better... not much choice of Italian food left, so...&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza5.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #5]]&lt;br /&gt;
5.- When the word is found, the Check button disappears. And the Info box displays Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 2 ===&lt;br /&gt;
Word to find in 6 tries: TIGER&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger0a.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #0]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #01]]&lt;br /&gt;
[... More tries ...]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:screenshot 02.png|left|frame|Screenshot #02]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger05.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #05]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:screenshot final.png|alt=Wordle Final screenshot |none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
Since the max number of tries was set at 6, if the word in not found, it is &amp;quot;given&amp;quot;. Note that the current score is marked as Incorrect. The General Feedback message is displayed &amp;quot;A quite ferocious animal&amp;quot;. Under it, the Incorrect and Score 0/5 are displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Question de type Devinette]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipo de pregunta Adivinanza]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=152710</id>
		<title>GIFT guessit format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=152710"/>
		<updated>2025-05-08T17:25:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;For general info about GIFT see the documentation at [[GIFT format]]. For information about the Guess It question type see the documentation at [[Guess it question type|Guess It question type]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specific GIFT guessit format plugin allows you to use a text editor to write &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; questions in a simple format that can be &#039;&#039;imported&#039;&#039; into your Moodle question bank. It can only be used if the &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; question type is already installed on your Moodle site, of course.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=152558</id>
		<title>Guess it question type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=152558"/>
		<updated>2025-05-07T15:57:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: added French link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = question type&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/rezeau/moodle-qtype_guessit/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[user:Joseph Rézeau|Joseph Rezeau]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installing this question type==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Warning|This question type is awaiting for approval in the Moodle plugins repository. It&#039;s available on my github repository but should not be installed on a Moodle production site.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the generic [[Installing plugins]] documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Guess It Question Type ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== History ===&lt;br /&gt;
Guess It  is an adaptation of a language game to be played on paper or on a classroom blackboard, dating back to the 1970s. It was one of the very first games I programmed on my [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Commodore_64 Commodore 64] in the mid 1980s.&lt;br /&gt;
I adapted Guess It to H5P a few years ago and it is still available on my Moodle/H5P test site [https://moodle/mod/page/view.php?id=34 here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rationale ===&lt;br /&gt;
The player (student) has to guess a &amp;quot;mystery sentence&amp;quot;, word by word. Each word entered by the student is compared letter by letter with the word to be guessed, starting from the beginning of the word. If a guessed letter matches the original letter, upon checking the answer, that letter is underlined with the equal sign (&#039;&#039;&#039;=&#039;&#039;&#039;). If the original letter&#039;s rank in the alphabet is situated &#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039; the letter typed by the student, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign (look before). And in the opposite case, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; (look after) sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The difficulty of the exercise resides in a number of factors. It is easier to guess a sentence which has been recently memorised in class or a well-known saying or proverb or a verse from the lyrics of a well-known song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a Guess It Question ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:adding guessit question-02.jpg|alt=adding guessit question screenshot|none|frame|adding guessit question screenshot]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Question name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter any name that is useful for organising your Questions; this name will not be displayed to the students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Instructions&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although this field shows the Required icon, it is in fact optional. Use this field to display any information that would help the student answer the question. All kind of text and media are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle option: Guess a word&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option will be explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Guessit word(s)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the field where you type the sentence that the student will have to guess, word by word. If you enter capitals and punctuation, they will be required for a correct answer, but help will be provided if they are missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the number of tries needed before the Help option becomes available. &#039;&#039;Never&#039;&#039; means that Help will never be available. Range available: Never, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the sentence to be guessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General feedback&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this in the same way as you would for any question type. Optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example scenario ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try0.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0.- Upon entering the game, the player is presented with a number of empty gaps corresponding to the number of words in the mysterious sentence.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1a.- Words are entered one by one in the provided gaps and you navigate to the next gap by pressing either the Tab or the Space keys. If needed, the size of gap #4 will &amp;quot;grow&amp;quot; to accommodate the word &amp;quot;favourite&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1b.- When Check is pressed, specific feedback is provided in the &amp;quot;feedback&amp;quot; zone as follows: Gap 1 shows that the first word of the sentence should start with a capital letter. The yellow background tells that the word entered is partially correct. Gap 2 shows that the 2nd word has been correctly guessed, and the word is displayed on a green background. The words in gaps 3 to 4 are on a red (incorrect) background. For each partially or incorrect word in the answer, marks are displayed just under the first letter, showing whether the letter to be found is located after (&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) or before (the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) the letter entered, in the alphabet. The letter &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; is simply given.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2a. The player has entered &amp;quot;Spring is a lovely period&amp;quot;, taking care to enter words whose first letter matches the &amp;lt; or &amp;gt; marks previously given in the specific feedback. Note that when new words are entered in the incorrectly marked gaps (red background) their background is reset to white until Check is pressed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2b. Specific feedback is provided again. Note that specific back displayed in the &amp;quot;feedback zone&amp;quot; is added for each successive try and numbered. This is especially helpful for incorrect words. In the example above, the player now knows that the word in Gap 3 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; and before &amp;quot;m&amp;quot; in the alphabet; the word in Gap 4 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;l&amp;quot; and the word in Gap 5 begins with a letter before &amp;quot;p&amp;quot;. Before attempting a new try at guessing the incorrect words, the player decides to get some help by clicking on the Get help button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2c.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2c.- Since in the question Options we set &#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039; to 6, a relevant message is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.- 6a-. And the scenario continues, with each new try adding its own specific feedback to the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6a.- The student clicks on Get help, after the required set number of tries has been reached...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6b. The last missing word is given. Note that the final full stop is also given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try7.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.- Finished! The navigation box at the top left shows Question 1 Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Wordle option ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle_edit01.jpg|none|frame|Word error]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the default Guess It question type, the student/player has to guess a sentence made up of several words. If the Wordle Option is selected in the edit form, then they have to guess a single word. This is based on a recently popular word game, see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wordle Wikipedia article]. In this Guess It question type, Wordle can use any length of words between 4 and 8, but the recommended default is 5 letters only. One limitation is that only CAPITAL LETTERS can be used, and no diacritics (accents). The above screen shows the ad hoc ERROR message displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle edit02b.jpg|none|frame|Fixed error]]&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended default number of tries is 10 but can be set at 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the word to be guessed. No help is provided other than the specific feedback colour scheme explained hereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 1 ===&lt;br /&gt;
For this scenario the word to be guesses is PIZZA and the maximum number of tries has been set to 6 (because this is a fairly common word, which should be guessed easily).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza0.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1]]&lt;br /&gt;
1.- The Wordle option only accepts UPPERCASE letters. If the player enters lowercase letters, they are automatically converted to uppercase. Each time the player enters a letter, the focus is placed on the next gap. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1a]]&lt;br /&gt;
When the last gap has been reached, the focus is placed on the Check button and the player can submit their answer by pressing either the Space or the Tab keys.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza1.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #2]]&lt;br /&gt;
2.- Feedback is provided using the same colouring scheme as for the regular Guessit game. Green for a correctly placed letter; yellow for a letter which is in the word but not correctly placed and red for a letter not in the word. The feedback message shows the distribution of the letters and the number of tries left.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza2.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #3]]&lt;br /&gt;
3.- As for the regular Guessit game, the successive tries are displayed. Here the player has correctly guessed the first letter (P) but none of their other letters are part of the work.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza3.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #4]]&lt;br /&gt;
4.- Looking better... not much choice of Italian food left, so...&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza5.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #5]]&lt;br /&gt;
5.- When the word is found, the Check button disappears. And the Info box displays Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 2 ===&lt;br /&gt;
Word to find in 6 tries: TIGER&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger0a.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #0]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #01]]&lt;br /&gt;
[... More tries ...]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:screenshot 02.png|left|frame|Screenshot #02]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger05.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #05]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:screenshot final.png|alt=Wordle Final screenshot |none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
Since the max number of tries was set at 6, if the word in not found, it is &amp;quot;given&amp;quot;. Note that the current score is marked as Incorrect. The General Feedback message is displayed &amp;quot;A quite ferocious animal&amp;quot;. Under it, the Incorrect and Score 0/5 are displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Question de type Devinette]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipo de pregunta Adivinanza]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=151174</id>
		<title>Guess it question type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=151174"/>
		<updated>2025-03-12T17:48:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Installing this question type */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = question type&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/rezeau/moodle-qtype_guessit/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[user:Joseph Rézeau|Joseph Rezeau]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installing this question type==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Warning|This question type is awaiting for approval in the Moodle plugins repository. It&#039;s available on my github repository but should not be installed on a Moodle production site.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the generic [[Installing plugins]] documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Guess It Question Type ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== History ===&lt;br /&gt;
Guess It  is an adaptation of a language game to be played on paper or on a classroom blackboard, dating back to the 1970s. It was one of the very first games I programmed on my [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Commodore_64 Commodore 64] in the mid 1980s.&lt;br /&gt;
I adapted Guess It to H5P a few years ago and it is still available on my Moodle/H5P test site [https://moodle/mod/page/view.php?id=34 here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rationale ===&lt;br /&gt;
The player (student) has to guess a &amp;quot;mystery sentence&amp;quot;, word by word. Each word entered by the student is compared letter by letter with the word to be guessed, starting from the beginning of the word. If a guessed letter matches the original letter, upon checking the answer, that letter is underlined with the equal sign (&#039;&#039;&#039;=&#039;&#039;&#039;). If the original letter&#039;s rank in the alphabet is situated &#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039; the letter typed by the student, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign (look before). And in the opposite case, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; (look after) sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The difficulty of the exercise resides in a number of factors. It is easier to guess a sentence which has been recently memorised in class or a well-known saying or proverb or a verse from the lyrics of a well-known song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a Guess It Question ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:adding guessit question-02.jpg|alt=adding guessit question screenshot|none|frame|adding guessit question screenshot]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Question name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter any name that is useful for organising your Questions; this name will not be displayed to the students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Instructions&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although this field shows the Required icon, it is in fact optional. Use this field to display any information that would help the student answer the question. All kind of text and media are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle option: Guess a word&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option will be explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Guessit word(s)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the field where you type the sentence that the student will have to guess, word by word. If you enter capitals and punctuation, they will be required for a correct answer, but help will be provided if they are missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the number of tries needed before the Help option becomes available. &#039;&#039;Never&#039;&#039; means that Help will never be available. Range available: Never, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the sentence to be guessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General feedback&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this in the same way as you would for any question type. Optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example scenario ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try0.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0.- Upon entering the game, the player is presented with a number of empty gaps corresponding to the number of words in the mysterious sentence.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1a.- Words are entered one by one in the provided gaps and you navigate to the next gap by pressing either the Tab or the Space keys. If needed, the size of gap #4 will &amp;quot;grow&amp;quot; to accommodate the word &amp;quot;favourite&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1b.- When Check is pressed, specific feedback is provided in the &amp;quot;feedback&amp;quot; zone as follows: Gap 1 shows that the first word of the sentence should start with a capital letter. The yellow background tells that the word entered is partially correct. Gap 2 shows that the 2nd word has been correctly guessed, and the word is displayed on a green background. The words in gaps 3 to 4 are on a red (incorrect) background. For each partially or incorrect word in the answer, marks are displayed just under the first letter, showing whether the letter to be found is located after (&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) or before (the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) the letter entered, in the alphabet. The letter &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; is simply given.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2a. The player has entered &amp;quot;Spring is a lovely period&amp;quot;, taking care to enter words whose first letter matches the &amp;lt; or &amp;gt; marks previously given in the specific feedback. Note that when new words are entered in the incorrectly marked gaps (red background) their background is reset to white until Check is pressed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2b. Specific feedback is provided again. Note that specific back displayed in the &amp;quot;feedback zone&amp;quot; is added for each successive try and numbered. This is especially helpful for incorrect words. In the example above, the player now knows that the word in Gap 3 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; and before &amp;quot;m&amp;quot; in the alphabet; the word in Gap 4 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;l&amp;quot; and the word in Gap 5 begins with a letter before &amp;quot;p&amp;quot;. Before attempting a new try at guessing the incorrect words, the player decides to get some help by clicking on the Get help button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2c.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2c.- Since in the question Options we set &#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039; to 6, a relevant message is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.- 6a-. And the scenario continues, with each new try adding its own specific feedback to the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6a.- The student clicks on Get help, after the required set number of tries has been reached...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6b. The last missing word is given. Note that the final full stop is also given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try7.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.- Finished! The navigation box at the top left shows Question 1 Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Wordle option ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle_edit01.jpg|none|frame|Word error]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the default Guess It question type, the student/player has to guess a sentence made up of several words. If the Wordle Option is selected in the edit form, then they have to guess a single word. This is based on a recently popular word game, see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wordle Wikipedia article]. In this Guess It question type, Wordle can use any length of words between 4 and 8, but the recommended default is 5 letters only. One limitation is that only CAPITAL LETTERS can be used, and no diacritics (accents). The above screen shows the ad hoc ERROR message displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle edit02b.jpg|none|frame|Fixed error]]&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended default number of tries is 10 but can be set at 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the word to be guessed. No help is provided other than the specific feedback colour scheme explained hereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 1 ===&lt;br /&gt;
For this scenario the word to be guesses is PIZZA and the maximum number of tries has been set to 6 (because this is a fairly common word, which should be guessed easily).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza0.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1]]&lt;br /&gt;
1.- The Wordle option only accepts UPPERCASE letters. If the player enters lowercase letters, they are automatically converted to uppercase. Each time the player enters a letter, the focus is placed on the next gap. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1a]]&lt;br /&gt;
When the last gap has been reached, the focus is placed on the Check button and the player can submit their answer by pressing either the Space or the Tab keys.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza1.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #2]]&lt;br /&gt;
2.- Feedback is provided using the same colouring scheme as for the regular Guessit game. Green for a correctly placed letter; yellow for a letter which is in the word but not correctly placed and red for a letter not in the word. The feedback message shows the distribution of the letters and the number of tries left.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza2.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #3]]&lt;br /&gt;
3.- As for the regular Guessit game, the successive tries are displayed. Here the player has correctly guessed the first letter (P) but none of their other letters are part of the work.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza3.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #4]]&lt;br /&gt;
4.- Looking better... not much choice of Italian food left, so...&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza5.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #5]]&lt;br /&gt;
5.- When the word is found, the Check button disappears. And the Info box displays Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 2 ===&lt;br /&gt;
Word to find in 6 tries: TIGER&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger0a.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #0]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #01]]&lt;br /&gt;
[... More tries ...]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:screenshot 02.png|left|frame|Screenshot #02]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger05.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #05]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:screenshot final.png|alt=Wordle Final screenshot |none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
Since the max number of tries was set at 6, if the word in not found, it is &amp;quot;given&amp;quot;. Note that the current score is marked as Incorrect. The General Feedback message is displayed &amp;quot;A quite ferocious animal&amp;quot;. Under it, the Incorrect and Score 0/5 are displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipo de pregunta Adivinanza]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=151173</id>
		<title>Guess it question type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=151173"/>
		<updated>2025-03-12T17:31:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Edit form */ updated screenshots for version release 1.1&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = question type&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/rezeau/moodle-qtype_guessit/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[user:Joseph Rézeau|Joseph Rezeau]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installing this question type==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Warning|This question type is under development and not yet available in the Moodle plugins repository. It&#039;s available on my github repository but should not be installed on a Moodle production site.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the generic [[Installing plugins]] documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Guess It Question Type ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== History ===&lt;br /&gt;
Guess It  is an adaptation of a language game to be played on paper or on a classroom blackboard, dating back to the 1970s. It was one of the very first games I programmed on my [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Commodore_64 Commodore 64] in the mid 1980s.&lt;br /&gt;
I adapted Guess It to H5P a few years ago and it is still available on my Moodle/H5P test site [https://moodle/mod/page/view.php?id=34 here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rationale ===&lt;br /&gt;
The player (student) has to guess a &amp;quot;mystery sentence&amp;quot;, word by word. Each word entered by the student is compared letter by letter with the word to be guessed, starting from the beginning of the word. If a guessed letter matches the original letter, upon checking the answer, that letter is underlined with the equal sign (&#039;&#039;&#039;=&#039;&#039;&#039;). If the original letter&#039;s rank in the alphabet is situated &#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039; the letter typed by the student, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign (look before). And in the opposite case, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; (look after) sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The difficulty of the exercise resides in a number of factors. It is easier to guess a sentence which has been recently memorised in class or a well-known saying or proverb or a verse from the lyrics of a well-known song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a Guess It Question ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:adding guessit question-02.jpg|alt=adding guessit question screenshot|none|frame|adding guessit question screenshot]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Question name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter any name that is useful for organising your Questions; this name will not be displayed to the students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Instructions&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although this field shows the Required icon, it is in fact optional. Use this field to display any information that would help the student answer the question. All kind of text and media are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle option: Guess a word&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option will be explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Guessit word(s)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the field where you type the sentence that the student will have to guess, word by word. If you enter capitals and punctuation, they will be required for a correct answer, but help will be provided if they are missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the number of tries needed before the Help option becomes available. &#039;&#039;Never&#039;&#039; means that Help will never be available. Range available: Never, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the sentence to be guessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General feedback&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this in the same way as you would for any question type. Optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example scenario ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try0.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0.- Upon entering the game, the player is presented with a number of empty gaps corresponding to the number of words in the mysterious sentence.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1a.- Words are entered one by one in the provided gaps and you navigate to the next gap by pressing either the Tab or the Space keys. If needed, the size of gap #4 will &amp;quot;grow&amp;quot; to accommodate the word &amp;quot;favourite&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1b.- When Check is pressed, specific feedback is provided in the &amp;quot;feedback&amp;quot; zone as follows: Gap 1 shows that the first word of the sentence should start with a capital letter. The yellow background tells that the word entered is partially correct. Gap 2 shows that the 2nd word has been correctly guessed, and the word is displayed on a green background. The words in gaps 3 to 4 are on a red (incorrect) background. For each partially or incorrect word in the answer, marks are displayed just under the first letter, showing whether the letter to be found is located after (&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) or before (the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) the letter entered, in the alphabet. The letter &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; is simply given.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2a. The player has entered &amp;quot;Spring is a lovely period&amp;quot;, taking care to enter words whose first letter matches the &amp;lt; or &amp;gt; marks previously given in the specific feedback. Note that when new words are entered in the incorrectly marked gaps (red background) their background is reset to white until Check is pressed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2b. Specific feedback is provided again. Note that specific back displayed in the &amp;quot;feedback zone&amp;quot; is added for each successive try and numbered. This is especially helpful for incorrect words. In the example above, the player now knows that the word in Gap 3 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; and before &amp;quot;m&amp;quot; in the alphabet; the word in Gap 4 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;l&amp;quot; and the word in Gap 5 begins with a letter before &amp;quot;p&amp;quot;. Before attempting a new try at guessing the incorrect words, the player decides to get some help by clicking on the Get help button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2c.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2c.- Since in the question Options we set &#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039; to 6, a relevant message is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.- 6a-. And the scenario continues, with each new try adding its own specific feedback to the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6a.- The student clicks on Get help, after the required set number of tries has been reached...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6b. The last missing word is given. Note that the final full stop is also given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try7.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.- Finished! The navigation box at the top left shows Question 1 Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Wordle option ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle_edit01.jpg|none|frame|Word error]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the default Guess It question type, the student/player has to guess a sentence made up of several words. If the Wordle Option is selected in the edit form, then they have to guess a single word. This is based on a recently popular word game, see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wordle Wikipedia article]. In this Guess It question type, Wordle can use any length of words between 4 and 8, but the recommended default is 5 letters only. One limitation is that only CAPITAL LETTERS can be used, and no diacritics (accents). The above screen shows the ad hoc ERROR message displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle edit02b.jpg|none|frame|Fixed error]]&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended default number of tries is 10 but can be set at 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the word to be guessed. No help is provided other than the specific feedback colour scheme explained hereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 1 ===&lt;br /&gt;
For this scenario the word to be guesses is PIZZA and the maximum number of tries has been set to 6 (because this is a fairly common word, which should be guessed easily).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza0.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1]]&lt;br /&gt;
1.- The Wordle option only accepts UPPERCASE letters. If the player enters lowercase letters, they are automatically converted to uppercase. Each time the player enters a letter, the focus is placed on the next gap. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1a]]&lt;br /&gt;
When the last gap has been reached, the focus is placed on the Check button and the player can submit their answer by pressing either the Space or the Tab keys.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza1.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #2]]&lt;br /&gt;
2.- Feedback is provided using the same colouring scheme as for the regular Guessit game. Green for a correctly placed letter; yellow for a letter which is in the word but not correctly placed and red for a letter not in the word. The feedback message shows the distribution of the letters and the number of tries left.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza2.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #3]]&lt;br /&gt;
3.- As for the regular Guessit game, the successive tries are displayed. Here the player has correctly guessed the first letter (P) but none of their other letters are part of the work.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza3.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #4]]&lt;br /&gt;
4.- Looking better... not much choice of Italian food left, so...&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza5.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #5]]&lt;br /&gt;
5.- When the word is found, the Check button disappears. And the Info box displays Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 2 ===&lt;br /&gt;
Word to find in 6 tries: TIGER&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger0a.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #0]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #01]]&lt;br /&gt;
[... More tries ...]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:screenshot 02.png|left|frame|Screenshot #02]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger05.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #05]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:screenshot final.png|alt=Wordle Final screenshot |none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
Since the max number of tries was set at 6, if the word in not found, it is &amp;quot;given&amp;quot;. Note that the current score is marked as Incorrect. The General Feedback message is displayed &amp;quot;A quite ferocious animal&amp;quot;. Under it, the Incorrect and Score 0/5 are displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipo de pregunta Adivinanza]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:wordle_edit02b.jpg&amp;diff=151172</id>
		<title>File:wordle edit02b.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:wordle_edit02b.jpg&amp;diff=151172"/>
		<updated>2025-03-12T17:29:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;wordle edit02b&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=151171</id>
		<title>Guess it question type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=151171"/>
		<updated>2025-03-12T17:26:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Edit form */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = question type&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/rezeau/moodle-qtype_guessit/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[user:Joseph Rézeau|Joseph Rezeau]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installing this question type==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Warning|This question type is under development and not yet available in the Moodle plugins repository. It&#039;s available on my github repository but should not be installed on a Moodle production site.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the generic [[Installing plugins]] documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Guess It Question Type ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== History ===&lt;br /&gt;
Guess It  is an adaptation of a language game to be played on paper or on a classroom blackboard, dating back to the 1970s. It was one of the very first games I programmed on my [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Commodore_64 Commodore 64] in the mid 1980s.&lt;br /&gt;
I adapted Guess It to H5P a few years ago and it is still available on my Moodle/H5P test site [https://moodle/mod/page/view.php?id=34 here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rationale ===&lt;br /&gt;
The player (student) has to guess a &amp;quot;mystery sentence&amp;quot;, word by word. Each word entered by the student is compared letter by letter with the word to be guessed, starting from the beginning of the word. If a guessed letter matches the original letter, upon checking the answer, that letter is underlined with the equal sign (&#039;&#039;&#039;=&#039;&#039;&#039;). If the original letter&#039;s rank in the alphabet is situated &#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039; the letter typed by the student, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign (look before). And in the opposite case, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; (look after) sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The difficulty of the exercise resides in a number of factors. It is easier to guess a sentence which has been recently memorised in class or a well-known saying or proverb or a verse from the lyrics of a well-known song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a Guess It Question ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:adding guessit question-02.jpg|alt=adding guessit question screenshot|none|frame|adding guessit question screenshot]]&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Question name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter any name that is useful for organising your Questions; this name will not be displayed to the students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Instructions&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although this field shows the Required icon, it is in fact optional. Use this field to display any information that would help the student answer the question. All kind of text and media are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle option: Guess a word&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option will be explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Guessit word(s)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the field where you type the sentence that the student will have to guess, word by word. If you enter capitals and punctuation, they will be required for a correct answer, but help will be provided if they are missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Gap Size to display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Dynamic Gap Size&#039;&#039; = each gap will grow to accommodate longish words if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Proportional Gap Size&#039;&#039; = each gap will be set to the same size as the gapped out word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Fixed Gap Size&#039;&#039; = all gaps will be set to the same size as the largest gap.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the number of tries needed before the Help option becomes available. &#039;&#039;Never&#039;&#039; means that Help will never be available. Range available: Never, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the sentence to be guessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Remove specific feedback&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove specific feedback when all gaps have been correctly filled in and the question is submitted. This is only useful in special cases discussed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General feedback&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this in the same way as you would for any question type. Optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example scenario ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try0.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0.- Upon entering the game, the player is presented with a number of empty gaps corresponding to the number of words in the mysterious sentence.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1a.- Words are entered one by one in the provided gaps and you navigate to the next gap by pressing either the Tab or the Space keys. Since the &#039;&#039;Dynamic Gap Size&#039;&#039;  was selected in the options, the size of gap #4 will &amp;quot;grow&amp;quot; to accommodate the word &amp;quot;favourite&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1b.- When Check is pressed, specific feedback is provided in the &amp;quot;feedback&amp;quot; zone as follows: Gap 1 shows that the first word of the sentence should start with a capital letter. The yellow background tells that the word entered is partially correct. Gap 2 shows that the 2nd word has been correctly guessed, and the word is displayed on a green background. The words in gaps 3 to 4 are on a red (incorrect) background. For each partially or incorrect word in the answer, marks are displayed just under the first letter, showing whether the letter to be found is located after (&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) or before (the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) the letter entered, in the alphabet. The letter &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; is simply given.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2a. The player has entered &amp;quot;Spring is a lovely period&amp;quot;, taking care to enter words whose first letter matches the &amp;lt; or &amp;gt; marks previously given in the specific feedback. Note that when new words are entered in the incorrectly marked gaps (red background) their background is reset to white until Check is pressed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2b. Specific feedback is provided again. Note that specific back displayed in the &amp;quot;feedback zone&amp;quot; is added for each successive try and numbered. This is especially helpful for incorrect words. In the example above, the player now knows that the word in Gap 3 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; and before &amp;quot;m&amp;quot; in the alphabet; the word in Gap 4 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;l&amp;quot; and the word in Gap 5 begins with a letter before &amp;quot;p&amp;quot;. Before attempting a new try at guessing the incorrect words, the player decides to get some help by clicking on the Get help button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2c.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2c.- Since in the question Options we set &#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039; to 6, a relevant message is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.- 6a-. And the scenario continues, with each new try adding its own specific feedback to the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6a.- The student clicks on Get help, after the required set number of tries has been reached...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6b. The last missing word is given. Note that the final full stop is also given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try7.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.- Finished! The navigation box at the top left shows Question 1 Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Wordle option ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle_edit01.jpg|none|frame|Word error]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the default Guess It question type, the student/player has to guess a sentence made up of several words. If the Wordle Option is selected in the edit form, then they have to guess a single word. This is based on a recently popular word game, see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wordle Wikipedia article]. In this Guess It question type, Wordle can use any length of words between 4 and 8, but the recommended default is 5 letters only. One limitation is that only CAPITAL LETTERS can be used, and no diacritics (accents). The above screen shows the ad hoc ERROR message displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle_edit02.jpg|none|frame|Fixed error]]&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended default number of tries is 10 but can be set at 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the word to be guessed. No help is provided other than the specific feedback colour scheme explained hereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 1 ===&lt;br /&gt;
For this scenario the word to be guesses is PIZZA and the maximum number of tries has been set to 6 (because this is a fairly common word, which should be guessed easily).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza0.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1]]&lt;br /&gt;
1.- The Wordle option only accepts UPPERCASE letters. If the player enters lowercase letters, they are automatically converted to uppercase. Each time the player enters a letter, the focus is placed on the next gap. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1a]]&lt;br /&gt;
When the last gap has been reached, the focus is placed on the Check button and the player can submit their answer by pressing either the Space or the Tab keys.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza1.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #2]]&lt;br /&gt;
2.- Feedback is provided using the same colouring scheme as for the regular Guessit game. Green for a correctly placed letter; yellow for a letter which is in the word but not correctly placed and red for a letter not in the word. The feedback message shows the distribution of the letters and the number of tries left.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza2.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #3]]&lt;br /&gt;
3.- As for the regular Guessit game, the successive tries are displayed. Here the player has correctly guessed the first letter (P) but none of their other letters are part of the work.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza3.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #4]]&lt;br /&gt;
4.- Looking better... not much choice of Italian food left, so...&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza5.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #5]]&lt;br /&gt;
5.- When the word is found, the Check button disappears. And the Info box displays Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 2 ===&lt;br /&gt;
Word to find in 6 tries: TIGER&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger0a.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #0]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #01]]&lt;br /&gt;
[... More tries ...]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:screenshot 02.png|left|frame|Screenshot #02]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger05.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #05]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:screenshot final.png|alt=Wordle Final screenshot |none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
Since the max number of tries was set at 6, if the word in not found, it is &amp;quot;given&amp;quot;. Note that the current score is marked as Incorrect. The General Feedback message is displayed &amp;quot;A quite ferocious animal&amp;quot;. Under it, the Incorrect and Score 0/5 are displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipo de pregunta Adivinanza]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:adding_guessit_question-02.jpg&amp;diff=151170</id>
		<title>File:adding guessit question-02.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:adding_guessit_question-02.jpg&amp;diff=151170"/>
		<updated>2025-03-12T17:25:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;adding guessit question screenshot&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=151151</id>
		<title>GIFT guessit format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=151151"/>
		<updated>2025-03-09T11:25:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Warning|This GIFT guessit format plugin is not yet available in the Moodle plugins repository. It will become available when it&#039;s been approved.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For general info about GIFT see the documentation at [[GIFT format]]. For information about the Guess It question type see the documentation at [[Guess it question type|Guess It question type]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specific GIFT guessit format plugin allows you to use a text editor to write &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; questions in a simple format that can be &#039;&#039;imported&#039;&#039; into your Moodle question bank. It can only be used if the &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; question type is already installed on your Moodle site, of course.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=151150</id>
		<title>GIFT guessit format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=151150"/>
		<updated>2025-03-09T11:24:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Warning|This GIFT guessit format plugin is not yet available in the Moodle plugins repository. It will become available when it&#039;s been approved.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For general info about GIFT see the documentation at [[GIFT format]]. For information about the Guess It question type see the documentation at [[Guess it question type|Guess It]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specific GIFT guessit format plugin allows you to use a text editor to write &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; questions in a simple format that can be &#039;&#039;imported&#039;&#039; into your Moodle question bank. It can only be used if the &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; question type is already installed on your Moodle site, of course.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=151149</id>
		<title>GIFT guessit format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=151149"/>
		<updated>2025-03-09T11:23:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Warning|This GIFT guessit format plugin is not yet available in the Moodle plugins repository. It will become available when it&#039;s been approved.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For general info about GIFT see the documentation at [[GIFT format]]. For information about the Guess It question type see the documentation at [[Guess It]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specific GIFT guessit format plugin allows you to use a text editor to write &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; questions in a simple format that can be &#039;&#039;imported&#039;&#039; into your Moodle question bank. It can only be used if the &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; question type is already installed on your Moodle site, of course.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=151148</id>
		<title>GIFT guessit format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=151148"/>
		<updated>2025-03-09T11:21:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Warning|This GIFT guessit format plugin is not yet available in the Moodle plugins repository. It will become available when it&#039;s been approved.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For general info about GIFT see the documentation at [[GIFT format]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specific GIFT guessit format plugin allows you to use a text editor to write &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; questions in a simple format that can be &#039;&#039;imported&#039;&#039; into your Moodle question bank. It can only be used if the &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; question type is already installed on your Moodle site, of course.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=151147</id>
		<title>GIFT guessit format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=151147"/>
		<updated>2025-03-09T11:20:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Warning|This GIFT format plugin is not yet available in the Moodle plugins repository. It will become available when it&#039;s been approved.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For general info about GIFT see the documentation at [[GIFT format]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specific GIFT guessit format plugin allows you to use a text editor to write &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; questions in a simple format that can be &#039;&#039;imported&#039;&#039; into your Moodle question bank. It can only be used if the &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; question type is already installed on your Moodle site, of course.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=151146</id>
		<title>GIFT guessit format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=151146"/>
		<updated>2025-03-09T11:19:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For general info about GIFT see the documentation at [[GIFT format]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The specific GIFT guessit format plugin allows you to use a text editor to write &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; questions in a simple format that can be &#039;&#039;imported&#039;&#039; into your Moodle question bank. It can only be used if the &#039;&#039;Guess It&#039;&#039; question type is already installed on your Moodle site, of course.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=151145</id>
		<title>GIFT guessit format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=151145"/>
		<updated>2025-03-09T11:08:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;For general info about GIFT see the documentation at [[GIFT format]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=151144</id>
		<title>GIFT guessit format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=151144"/>
		<updated>2025-03-09T11:05:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Work in progress...&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=151135</id>
		<title>Guess it question type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=151135"/>
		<updated>2025-03-04T21:58:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Scenario 2 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = question type&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/rezeau/moodle-qtype_guessit/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[user:Joseph Rézeau|Joseph Rezeau]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installing this question type==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Warning|This question type is under development and not yet available in the Moodle plugins repository. It&#039;s available on my github repository but should not be installed on a Moodle production site.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the generic [[Installing plugins]] documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Guess It Question Type ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== History ===&lt;br /&gt;
Guess It  is an adaptation of a language game to be played on paper or on a classroom blackboard, dating back to the 1970s. It was one of the very first games I programmed on my [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Commodore_64 Commodore 64] in the mid 1980s.&lt;br /&gt;
I adapted Guess It to H5P a few years ago and it is still available on my Moodle/H5P test site [https://moodle/mod/page/view.php?id=34 here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rationale ===&lt;br /&gt;
The player (student) has to guess a &amp;quot;mystery sentence&amp;quot;, word by word. Each word entered by the student is compared letter by letter with the word to be guessed, starting from the beginning of the word. If a guessed letter matches the original letter, upon checking the answer, that letter is underlined with the equal sign (&#039;&#039;&#039;=&#039;&#039;&#039;). If the original letter&#039;s rank in the alphabet is situated &#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039; the letter typed by the student, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign (look before). And in the opposite case, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; (look after) sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The difficulty of the exercise resides in a number of factors. It is easier to guess a sentence which has been recently memorised in class or a well-known saying or proverb or a verse from the lyrics of a well-known song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a Guess It Question ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:adding_guessit_question.jpg|none|frame]]&#039;&#039;&#039;Question name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter any name that is useful for organising your Questions; this name will not be displayed to the students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Instructions&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although this field shows the Required icon, it is in fact optional. Use this field to display any information that would help the student answer the question. All kind of text and media are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle option: Guess a word&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option will be explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Guessit word(s)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the field where you type the sentence that the student will have to guess, word by word. If you enter capitals and punctuation, they will be required for a correct answer, but help will be provided if they are missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Gap Size to display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Dynamic Gap Size&#039;&#039; = each gap will grow to accommodate longish words if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Proportional Gap Size&#039;&#039; = each gap will be set to the same size as the gapped out word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Fixed Gap Size&#039;&#039; = all gaps will be set to the same size as the largest gap.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the number of tries needed before the Help option becomes available. &#039;&#039;Never&#039;&#039; means that Help will never be available. Range available: Never, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the sentence to be guessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Remove specific feedback&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove specific feedback when all gaps have been correctly filled in and the question is submitted. This is only useful in special cases discussed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General feedback&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this in the same way as you would for any question type. Optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example scenario ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try0.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0.- Upon entering the game, the player is presented with a number of empty gaps corresponding to the number of words in the mysterious sentence.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1a.- Words are entered one by one in the provided gaps and you navigate to the next gap by pressing either the Tab or the Space keys. Since the &#039;&#039;Dynamic Gap Size&#039;&#039;  was selected in the options, the size of gap #4 will &amp;quot;grow&amp;quot; to accommodate the word &amp;quot;favourite&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1b.- When Check is pressed, specific feedback is provided in the &amp;quot;feedback&amp;quot; zone as follows: Gap 1 shows that the first word of the sentence should start with a capital letter. The yellow background tells that the word entered is partially correct. Gap 2 shows that the 2nd word has been correctly guessed, and the word is displayed on a green background. The words in gaps 3 to 4 are on a red (incorrect) background. For each partially or incorrect word in the answer, marks are displayed just under the first letter, showing whether the letter to be found is located after (&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) or before (the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) the letter entered, in the alphabet. The letter &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; is simply given.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2a. The player has entered &amp;quot;Spring is a lovely period&amp;quot;, taking care to enter words whose first letter matches the &amp;lt; or &amp;gt; marks previously given in the specific feedback. Note that when new words are entered in the incorrectly marked gaps (red background) their background is reset to white until Check is pressed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2b. Specific feedback is provided again. Note that specific back displayed in the &amp;quot;feedback zone&amp;quot; is added for each successive try and numbered. This is especially helpful for incorrect words. In the example above, the player now knows that the word in Gap 3 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; and before &amp;quot;m&amp;quot; in the alphabet; the word in Gap 4 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;l&amp;quot; and the word in Gap 5 begins with a letter before &amp;quot;p&amp;quot;. Before attempting a new try at guessing the incorrect words, the player decides to get some help by clicking on the Get help button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2c.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2c.- Since in the question Options we set &#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039; to 6, a relevant message is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.- 6a-. And the scenario continues, with each new try adding its own specific feedback to the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6a.- The student clicks on Get help, after the required set number of tries has been reached...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6b. The last missing word is given. Note that the final full stop is also given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try7.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.- Finished! The navigation box at the top left shows Question 1 Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Wordle option ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle_edit01.jpg|none|frame|Word error]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the default Guess It question type, the student/player has to guess a sentence made up of several words. If the Wordle Option is selected in the edit form, then they have to guess a single word. This is based on a recently popular word game, see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wordle Wikipedia article]. In this Guess It question type, Wordle can use any length of words between 4 and 8, but the recommended default is 5 letters only. One limitation is that only CAPITAL LETTERS can be used, and no diacritics (accents). The above screen shows the ad hoc ERROR message displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle_edit02.jpg|none|frame|Fixed error]]&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended default number of tries is 10 but can be set at 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the word to be guessed. No help is provided other than the specific feedback colour scheme explained hereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 1 ===&lt;br /&gt;
For this scenario the word to be guesses is PIZZA and the maximum number of tries has been set to 6 (because this is a fairly common word, which should be guessed easily).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza0.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1]]&lt;br /&gt;
1.- The Wordle option only accepts UPPERCASE letters. If the player enters lowercase letters, they are automatically converted to uppercase. Each time the player enters a letter, the focus is placed on the next gap. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1a]]&lt;br /&gt;
When the last gap has been reached, the focus is placed on the Check button and the player can submit their answer by pressing either the Space or the Tab keys.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza1.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #2]]&lt;br /&gt;
2.- Feedback is provided using the same colouring scheme as for the regular Guessit game. Green for a correctly placed letter; yellow for a letter which is in the word but not correctly placed and red for a letter not in the word. The feedback message shows the distribution of the letters and the number of tries left.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza2.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #3]]&lt;br /&gt;
3.- As for the regular Guessit game, the successive tries are displayed. Here the player has correctly guessed the first letter (P) but none of their other letters are part of the work.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza3.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #4]]&lt;br /&gt;
4.- Looking better... not much choice of Italian food left, so...&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza5.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #5]]&lt;br /&gt;
5.- When the word is found, the Check button disappears. And the Info box displays Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 2 ===&lt;br /&gt;
Word to find in 6 tries: TIGER&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger0a.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #0]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #01]]&lt;br /&gt;
[... More tries ...]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:screenshot 02.png|left|frame|Screenshot #02]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger05.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #05]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:screenshot final.png|alt=Wordle Final screenshot |none|frame]]&lt;br /&gt;
Since the max number of tries was set at 6, if the word in not found, it is &amp;quot;given&amp;quot;. Note that the current score is marked as Incorrect. The General Feedback message is displayed &amp;quot;A quite ferocious animal&amp;quot;. Under it, the Incorrect and Score 0/5 are displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipo de pregunta Adivinanza]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:screenshot_final.png&amp;diff=151134</id>
		<title>File:screenshot final.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:screenshot_final.png&amp;diff=151134"/>
		<updated>2025-03-04T21:55:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;screenshot final&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:screenshot_02.png&amp;diff=151133</id>
		<title>File:screenshot 02.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:screenshot_02.png&amp;diff=151133"/>
		<updated>2025-03-04T21:45:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;screenshot 02&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=151085</id>
		<title>GIFT guessit format</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=GIFT_guessit_format&amp;diff=151085"/>
		<updated>2025-02-20T18:06:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: Created page with &amp;quot;waiting for redirection from https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/qformat/gift_guessit&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;waiting for redirection from https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/qformat/gift_guessit&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=qformat/gift_guessit&amp;diff=151084</id>
		<title>qformat/gift guessit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=qformat/gift_guessit&amp;diff=151084"/>
		<updated>2025-02-20T17:54:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: Created page with &amp;quot;waiting for re-direction&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;waiting for re-direction&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=151083</id>
		<title>Guess it question type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=151083"/>
		<updated>2025-02-20T16:13:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Edit form */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = question type&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/rezeau/moodle-qtype_guessit/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[user:Joseph Rézeau|Joseph Rezeau]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installing this question type==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Warning|This question type is under development and not yet available in the Moodle plugins repository. It&#039;s available on my github repository but should not be installed on a Moodle production site.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the generic [[Installing plugins]] documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Guess It Question Type ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== History ===&lt;br /&gt;
Guess It  is an adaptation of a language game to be played on paper or on a classroom blackboard, dating back to the 1970s. It was one of the very first games I programmed on my [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Commodore_64 Commodore 64] in the mid 1980s.&lt;br /&gt;
I adapted Guess It to H5P a few years ago and it is still available on my Moodle/H5P test site [https://moodle/mod/page/view.php?id=34 here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rationale ===&lt;br /&gt;
The player (student) has to guess a &amp;quot;mystery sentence&amp;quot;, word by word. Each word entered by the student is compared letter by letter with the word to be guessed, starting from the beginning of the word. If a guessed letter matches the original letter, upon checking the answer, that letter is underlined with the equal sign (&#039;&#039;&#039;=&#039;&#039;&#039;). If the original letter&#039;s rank in the alphabet is situated &#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039; the letter typed by the student, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign (look before). And in the opposite case, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; (look after) sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The difficulty of the exercise resides in a number of factors. It is easier to guess a sentence which has been recently memorised in class or a well-known saying or proverb or a verse from the lyrics of a well-known song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a Guess It Question ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:adding_guessit_question.jpg|none|frame]]&#039;&#039;&#039;Question name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter any name that is useful for organising your Questions; this name will not be displayed to the students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Instructions&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although this field shows the Required icon, it is in fact optional. Use this field to display any information that would help the student answer the question. All kind of text and media are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle option: Guess a word&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option will be explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Guessit word(s)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the field where you type the sentence that the student will have to guess, word by word. If you enter capitals and punctuation, they will be required for a correct answer, but help will be provided if they are missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Gap Size to display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Dynamic Gap Size&#039;&#039; = each gap will grow to accommodate longish words if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Proportional Gap Size&#039;&#039; = each gap will be set to the same size as the gapped out word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Fixed Gap Size&#039;&#039; = all gaps will be set to the same size as the largest gap.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the number of tries needed before the Help option becomes available. &#039;&#039;Never&#039;&#039; means that Help will never be available. Range available: Never, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the sentence to be guessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Remove specific feedback&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove specific feedback when all gaps have been correctly filled in and the question is submitted. This is only useful in special cases discussed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General feedback&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this in the same way as you would for any question type. Optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example scenario ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try0.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0.- Upon entering the game, the player is presented with a number of empty gaps corresponding to the number of words in the mysterious sentence.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1a.- Words are entered one by one in the provided gaps and you navigate to the next gap by pressing either the Tab or the Space keys. Since the &#039;&#039;Dynamic Gap Size&#039;&#039;  was selected in the options, the size of gap #4 will &amp;quot;grow&amp;quot; to accommodate the word &amp;quot;favourite&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1b.- When Check is pressed, specific feedback is provided in the &amp;quot;feedback&amp;quot; zone as follows: Gap 1 shows that the first word of the sentence should start with a capital letter. The yellow background tells that the word entered is partially correct. Gap 2 shows that the 2nd word has been correctly guessed, and the word is displayed on a green background. The words in gaps 3 to 4 are on a red (incorrect) background. For each partially or incorrect word in the answer, marks are displayed just under the first letter, showing whether the letter to be found is located after (&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) or before (the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) the letter entered, in the alphabet. The letter &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; is simply given.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2a. The player has entered &amp;quot;Spring is a lovely period&amp;quot;, taking care to enter words whose first letter matches the &amp;lt; or &amp;gt; marks previously given in the specific feedback. Note that when new words are entered in the incorrectly marked gaps (red background) their background is reset to white until Check is pressed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2b. Specific feedback is provided again. Note that specific back displayed in the &amp;quot;feedback zone&amp;quot; is added for each successive try and numbered. This is especially helpful for incorrect words. In the example above, the player now knows that the word in Gap 3 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; and before &amp;quot;m&amp;quot; in the alphabet; the word in Gap 4 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;l&amp;quot; and the word in Gap 5 begins with a letter before &amp;quot;p&amp;quot;. Before attempting a new try at guessing the incorrect words, the player decides to get some help by clicking on the Get help button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2c.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2c.- Since in the question Options we set &#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039; to 6, a relevant message is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.- 6a-. And the scenario continues, with each new try adding its own specific feedback to the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6a.- The student clicks on Get help, after the required set number of tries has been reached...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6b. The last missing word is given. Note that the final full stop is also given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try7.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.- Finished! The navigation box at the top left shows Question 1 Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Wordle option ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle_edit01.jpg|none|frame|Word error]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the default Guess It question type, the student/player has to guess a sentence made up of several words. If the Wordle Option is selected in the edit form, then they have to guess a single word. This is based on a recently popular word game, see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wordle Wikipedia article]. In this Guess It question type, Wordle can use any length of words between 4 and 8, but the recommended default is 5 letters only. One limitation is that only CAPITAL LETTERS can be used, and no diacritics (accents). The above screen shows the ad hoc ERROR message displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle_edit02.jpg|none|frame|Fixed error]]&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended default number of tries is 10 but can be set at 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the word to be guessed. No help is provided other than the specific feedback colour scheme explained hereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 1 ===&lt;br /&gt;
For this scenario the word to be guesses is PIZZA and the maximum number of tries has been set to 6 (because this is a fairly common word, which should be guessed easily).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza0.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1]]&lt;br /&gt;
1.- The Wordle option only accepts UPPERCASE letters. If the player enters lowercase letters, they are automatically converted to uppercase. Each time the player enters a letter, the focus is placed on the next gap. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1a]]&lt;br /&gt;
When the last gap has been reached, the focus is placed on the Check button and the player can submit their answer by pressing either the Space or the Tab keys.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza1.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #2]]&lt;br /&gt;
2.- Feedback is provided using the same colouring scheme as for the regular Guessit game. Green for a correctly placed letter; yellow for a letter which is in the word but not correctly placed and red for a letter not in the word. The feedback message shows the distribution of the letters and the number of tries left.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza2.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #3]]&lt;br /&gt;
3.- As for the regular Guessit game, the successive tries are displayed. Here the player has correctly guessed the first letter (P) but none of their other letters are part of the work.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza3.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #4]]&lt;br /&gt;
4.- Looking better... not much choice of Italian food left, so...&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza5.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #5]]&lt;br /&gt;
5.- When the word is found, the Check button disappears. And the Info box displays Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 2 ===&lt;br /&gt;
Word to find in 6 tries: TIGER&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger0a.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #0]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #01]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger02.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #02]]&lt;br /&gt;
[... More tries ...]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger05.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #05]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger06.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #06]]&lt;br /&gt;
Since the max number of tries was set at 6, if the word in not found, it is &amp;quot;given&amp;quot;. Note that the current score is marked as Partially correct and 3/5. However, when the player submits their answer, the question is marked as Not answered and the score is 0/5, as displayed on following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger07.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #07]]&lt;br /&gt;
Under the summary of previous tries the General Feedback message is displayed &amp;quot;Yes, quite ferocious&amp;quot;. Under it, the Partially correct and Score 3/5 are still displayed. There is currently no way to prevent this, so when this question is included in a Moodle Quiz, the Review options should be set to avoid this counter-intuitive display.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipo de pregunta Adivinanza]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=151082</id>
		<title>Guess it question type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=151082"/>
		<updated>2025-02-20T16:11:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Rationale */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = question type&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/rezeau/moodle-qtype_guessit/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[user:Joseph Rézeau|Joseph Rezeau]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installing this question type==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Warning|This question type is under development and not yet available in the Moodle plugins repository. It&#039;s available on my github repository but should not be installed on a Moodle production site.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the generic [[Installing plugins]] documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Guess It Question Type ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== History ===&lt;br /&gt;
Guess It  is an adaptation of a language game to be played on paper or on a classroom blackboard, dating back to the 1970s. It was one of the very first games I programmed on my [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Commodore_64 Commodore 64] in the mid 1980s.&lt;br /&gt;
I adapted Guess It to H5P a few years ago and it is still available on my Moodle/H5P test site [https://moodle/mod/page/view.php?id=34 here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rationale ===&lt;br /&gt;
The player (student) has to guess a &amp;quot;mystery sentence&amp;quot;, word by word. Each word entered by the student is compared letter by letter with the word to be guessed, starting from the beginning of the word. If a guessed letter matches the original letter, upon checking the answer, that letter is underlined with the equal sign (&#039;&#039;&#039;=&#039;&#039;&#039;). If the original letter&#039;s rank in the alphabet is situated &#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039; the letter typed by the student, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign (look before). And in the opposite case, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; (look after) sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The difficulty of the exercise resides in a number of factors. It is easier to guess a sentence which has been recently memorised in class or a well-known saying or proverb or a verse from the lyrics of a well-known song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a Guess It Question ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:adding_guessit_question.jpg|none|frame]]&#039;&#039;&#039;Question name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter any name that is useful for organising your Questions; this name will not be displayed to the students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Instructions&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although this field shows the Required icon, it is in fact optional. Use this field to display any information that would help the student answer the question. All kind of text and media are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle option: Guess a word&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option will be explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Guessit word(s)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the field where you type the sentence that the student will have to guess, word by word. If you enter capitals and punctuation, they will be required for a correct answer, but help will be provided if they are missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Gap Size to display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Dynamic Gap Size&#039;&#039; = each gap will grow to accommodate longish words if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Proportional Gap Size&#039;&#039; = each gap will be set to the same size as the gapped out word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Fixed Gap Size&#039;&#039; = all gaps will be set to the same size as the largest gap.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the number of tries needed before the Help option becomes available. &#039;&#039;Never&#039;&#039; means that Help will never be available. Range available: Never, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the sentence to be guessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Remove specific feedback&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove specific feedback when all gaps have been correctly filled in and the question is submitted. This is only useful in special cases discussed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General feedback&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this in the same way as you would for any question type. Optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example scenario ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try0.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0.- Upon entering the game, the player is presented with a number of empty gaps corresponding to the number of words in the mysterious sentence.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1a.- Words are entered one by one in the provided gaps and you navigate to the next gap by pressing either the Tab or the Space keys. Since the &#039;&#039;Dynamic Gap Size&#039;&#039;  was selected in the options, the size of gap #4 will &amp;quot;grow&amp;quot; to accommodate the word &amp;quot;favourite&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1b.- When Check is pressed, specific feedback is provided in the &amp;quot;feedback&amp;quot; zone as follows: Gap 1 shows that the first word of the sentence should start with a capital letter. The yellow background tells that the word entered is partially correct. Gap 2 shows that the 2nd word has been correctly guessed, and the word is displayed on a green background. The words in gaps 3 to 4 are on a red (incorrect) background. For each partially or incorrect word in the answer, marks are displayed just under the first letter, showing whether the letter to be found is located after (&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) or before (the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) the letter entered, in the alphabet. The letter &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; is simply given.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2a. The player has entered &amp;quot;Spring is a lovely period&amp;quot;, taking care to enter words whose first letter matches the &amp;lt; or &amp;gt; marks previously given in the specific feedback. Note that when new words are entered in the incorrectly marked gaps (red background) their background is reset to white until Check is pressed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2b. Specific feedback is provided again. Note that specific back displayed in the &amp;quot;feedback zone&amp;quot; is added for each successive try and numbered. This is especially helpful for incorrect words. In the example above, the player now knows that the word in Gap 3 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; and before &amp;quot;m&amp;quot; in the alphabet; the word in Gap 4 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;l&amp;quot; and the word in Gap 5 begins with a letter before &amp;quot;p&amp;quot;. Before attempting a new try at guessing the incorrect words, the player decides to get some help by clicking on the Get help button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2c.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2c.- Since in the question Options we set &#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039; to 6, a relevant message is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.- 6a-. And the scenario continues, with each new try adding its own specific feedback to the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6a.- The student clicks on Get help, after the required set number of tries has been reached...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6b. The last missing word is given. Note that the final full stop is also given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try7.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.- Finished! The navigation box at the top left shows Question 1 Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Wordle option ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle_edit01.jpg|none|frame|Word error]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the default Guess It question type, the student/player has to guess a sentence made up of several words. If the Wordle Option is selected in the edit form, then they have to guess a single word. This is based on a recently popular word game, see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wordle Wikipedia article]. In this Guess It question type, Wordle can use any length of words, but the recommended default is 5 letters only. One limitation is that only CAPITAL LETTERS can be used, and no diacritics (accents). The above screen shows the ad hoc ERROR message displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle_edit02.jpg|none|frame|Fixed error]]&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended default number of tries is 10 but can be set at 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the word to be guessed. No help is provided other than the specific feedback colour scheme explained hereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 1 ===&lt;br /&gt;
For this scenario the word to be guesses is PIZZA and the maximum number of tries has been set to 6 (because this is a fairly common word, which should be guessed easily).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza0.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1]]&lt;br /&gt;
1.- The Wordle option only accepts UPPERCASE letters. If the player enters lowercase letters, they are automatically converted to uppercase. Each time the player enters a letter, the focus is placed on the next gap. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1a]]&lt;br /&gt;
When the last gap has been reached, the focus is placed on the Check button and the player can submit their answer by pressing either the Space or the Tab keys.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza1.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #2]]&lt;br /&gt;
2.- Feedback is provided using the same colouring scheme as for the regular Guessit game. Green for a correctly placed letter; yellow for a letter which is in the word but not correctly placed and red for a letter not in the word. The feedback message shows the distribution of the letters and the number of tries left.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza2.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #3]]&lt;br /&gt;
3.- As for the regular Guessit game, the successive tries are displayed. Here the player has correctly guessed the first letter (P) but none of their other letters are part of the work.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza3.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #4]]&lt;br /&gt;
4.- Looking better... not much choice of Italian food left, so...&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza5.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #5]]&lt;br /&gt;
5.- When the word is found, the Check button disappears. And the Info box displays Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 2 ===&lt;br /&gt;
Word to find in 6 tries: TIGER&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger0a.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #0]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #01]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger02.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #02]]&lt;br /&gt;
[... More tries ...]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger05.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #05]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger06.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #06]]&lt;br /&gt;
Since the max number of tries was set at 6, if the word in not found, it is &amp;quot;given&amp;quot;. Note that the current score is marked as Partially correct and 3/5. However, when the player submits their answer, the question is marked as Not answered and the score is 0/5, as displayed on following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger07.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #07]]&lt;br /&gt;
Under the summary of previous tries the General Feedback message is displayed &amp;quot;Yes, quite ferocious&amp;quot;. Under it, the Partially correct and Score 3/5 are still displayed. There is currently no way to prevent this, so when this question is included in a Moodle Quiz, the Review options should be set to avoid this counter-intuitive display.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipo de pregunta Adivinanza]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=151081</id>
		<title>Guess it question type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=151081"/>
		<updated>2025-02-20T16:10:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Rationale */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = question type&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/rezeau/moodle-qtype_guessit/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[user:Joseph Rézeau|Joseph Rezeau]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installing this question type==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Warning|This question type is under development and not yet available in the Moodle plugins repository. It&#039;s available on my github repository but should not be installed on a Moodle production site.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the generic [[Installing plugins]] documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Guess It Question Type ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== History ===&lt;br /&gt;
Guess It  is an adaptation of a language game to be played on paper or on a classroom blackboard, dating back to the 1970s. It was one of the very first games I programmed on my [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Commodore_64 Commodore 64] in the mid 1980s.&lt;br /&gt;
I adapted Guess It to H5P a few years ago and it is still available on my Moodle/H5P test site [https://moodle/mod/page/view.php?id=34 here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rationale ===&lt;br /&gt;
The player (student) has to guess a &amp;quot;mystery sentence&amp;quot;, word by word. Each word entered by the student is compared letter by letter with the word to be guessed, starting from the beginning of the word. If a guessed letter matches the original letter, upon checking the answer, that letter is underlined with the equal sign (&#039;&#039;&#039;=&#039;&#039;&#039;). If the original letter&#039;s rank in the alphabet is situated &#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039; the letter typed by the student, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign (look after). And in the opposite case, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; (look behind) sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The difficulty of the exercise resides in a number of factors. It is easier to guess a sentence which has been recently memorised in class or a well-known saying or proverb or a verse from the lyrics of a well-known song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a Guess It Question ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:adding_guessit_question.jpg|none|frame]]&#039;&#039;&#039;Question name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter any name that is useful for organising your Questions; this name will not be displayed to the students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Instructions&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although this field shows the Required icon, it is in fact optional. Use this field to display any information that would help the student answer the question. All kind of text and media are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle option: Guess a word&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option will be explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Guessit word(s)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the field where you type the sentence that the student will have to guess, word by word. If you enter capitals and punctuation, they will be required for a correct answer, but help will be provided if they are missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Gap Size to display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Dynamic Gap Size&#039;&#039; = each gap will grow to accommodate longish words if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Proportional Gap Size&#039;&#039; = each gap will be set to the same size as the gapped out word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Fixed Gap Size&#039;&#039; = all gaps will be set to the same size as the largest gap.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the number of tries needed before the Help option becomes available. &#039;&#039;Never&#039;&#039; means that Help will never be available. Range available: Never, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the sentence to be guessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Remove specific feedback&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove specific feedback when all gaps have been correctly filled in and the question is submitted. This is only useful in special cases discussed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General feedback&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this in the same way as you would for any question type. Optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example scenario ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try0.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0.- Upon entering the game, the player is presented with a number of empty gaps corresponding to the number of words in the mysterious sentence.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1a.- Words are entered one by one in the provided gaps and you navigate to the next gap by pressing either the Tab or the Space keys. Since the &#039;&#039;Dynamic Gap Size&#039;&#039;  was selected in the options, the size of gap #4 will &amp;quot;grow&amp;quot; to accommodate the word &amp;quot;favourite&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1b.- When Check is pressed, specific feedback is provided in the &amp;quot;feedback&amp;quot; zone as follows: Gap 1 shows that the first word of the sentence should start with a capital letter. The yellow background tells that the word entered is partially correct. Gap 2 shows that the 2nd word has been correctly guessed, and the word is displayed on a green background. The words in gaps 3 to 4 are on a red (incorrect) background. For each partially or incorrect word in the answer, marks are displayed just under the first letter, showing whether the letter to be found is located after (&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) or before (the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) the letter entered, in the alphabet. The letter &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; is simply given.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2a. The player has entered &amp;quot;Spring is a lovely period&amp;quot;, taking care to enter words whose first letter matches the &amp;lt; or &amp;gt; marks previously given in the specific feedback. Note that when new words are entered in the incorrectly marked gaps (red background) their background is reset to white until Check is pressed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2b. Specific feedback is provided again. Note that specific back displayed in the &amp;quot;feedback zone&amp;quot; is added for each successive try and numbered. This is especially helpful for incorrect words. In the example above, the player now knows that the word in Gap 3 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; and before &amp;quot;m&amp;quot; in the alphabet; the word in Gap 4 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;l&amp;quot; and the word in Gap 5 begins with a letter before &amp;quot;p&amp;quot;. Before attempting a new try at guessing the incorrect words, the player decides to get some help by clicking on the Get help button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2c.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2c.- Since in the question Options we set &#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039; to 6, a relevant message is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.- 6a-. And the scenario continues, with each new try adding its own specific feedback to the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6a.- The student clicks on Get help, after the required set number of tries has been reached...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6b. The last missing word is given. Note that the final full stop is also given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try7.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.- Finished! The navigation box at the top left shows Question 1 Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Wordle option ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle_edit01.jpg|none|frame|Word error]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the default Guess It question type, the student/player has to guess a sentence made up of several words. If the Wordle Option is selected in the edit form, then they have to guess a single word. This is based on a recently popular word game, see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wordle Wikipedia article]. In this Guess It question type, Wordle can use any length of words, but the recommended default is 5 letters only. One limitation is that only CAPITAL LETTERS can be used, and no diacritics (accents). The above screen shows the ad hoc ERROR message displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle_edit02.jpg|none|frame|Fixed error]]&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended default number of tries is 10 but can be set at 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the word to be guessed. No help is provided other than the specific feedback colour scheme explained hereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 1 ===&lt;br /&gt;
For this scenario the word to be guesses is PIZZA and the maximum number of tries has been set to 6 (because this is a fairly common word, which should be guessed easily).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza0.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1]]&lt;br /&gt;
1.- The Wordle option only accepts UPPERCASE letters. If the player enters lowercase letters, they are automatically converted to uppercase. Each time the player enters a letter, the focus is placed on the next gap. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1a]]&lt;br /&gt;
When the last gap has been reached, the focus is placed on the Check button and the player can submit their answer by pressing either the Space or the Tab keys.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza1.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #2]]&lt;br /&gt;
2.- Feedback is provided using the same colouring scheme as for the regular Guessit game. Green for a correctly placed letter; yellow for a letter which is in the word but not correctly placed and red for a letter not in the word. The feedback message shows the distribution of the letters and the number of tries left.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza2.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #3]]&lt;br /&gt;
3.- As for the regular Guessit game, the successive tries are displayed. Here the player has correctly guessed the first letter (P) but none of their other letters are part of the work.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza3.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #4]]&lt;br /&gt;
4.- Looking better... not much choice of Italian food left, so...&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza5.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #5]]&lt;br /&gt;
5.- When the word is found, the Check button disappears. And the Info box displays Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 2 ===&lt;br /&gt;
Word to find in 6 tries: TIGER&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger0a.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #0]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #01]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger02.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #02]]&lt;br /&gt;
[... More tries ...]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger05.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #05]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger06.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #06]]&lt;br /&gt;
Since the max number of tries was set at 6, if the word in not found, it is &amp;quot;given&amp;quot;. Note that the current score is marked as Partially correct and 3/5. However, when the player submits their answer, the question is marked as Not answered and the score is 0/5, as displayed on following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger07.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #07]]&lt;br /&gt;
Under the summary of previous tries the General Feedback message is displayed &amp;quot;Yes, quite ferocious&amp;quot;. Under it, the Partially correct and Score 3/5 are still displayed. There is currently no way to prevent this, so when this question is included in a Moodle Quiz, the Review options should be set to avoid this counter-intuitive display.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipo de pregunta Adivinanza]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=151035</id>
		<title>Guess it question type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=151035"/>
		<updated>2025-02-05T21:53:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Scenario 2 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = question type&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/rezeau/moodle-qtype_guessit/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[user:Joseph Rézeau|Joseph Rezeau]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installing this question type==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Warning|This question type is under development and not yet available in the Moodle plugins repository. It&#039;s available on my github repository but should not be installed on a Moodle production site.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the generic [[Installing plugins]] documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Guess It Question Type ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== History ===&lt;br /&gt;
Guess It  is an adaptation of a language game to be played on paper or on a classroom blackboard, dating back to the 1970s. It was one of the very first games I programmed on my [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Commodore_64 Commodore 64] in the mid 1980s.&lt;br /&gt;
I adapted Guess It to H5P a few years ago and it is still available on my Moodle/H5P test site [https://moodle/mod/page/view.php?id=34 here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rationale ===&lt;br /&gt;
The player (student) has to guess a &amp;quot;mystery sentence&amp;quot;, word by word. Each word entered by the student is compared letter by letter with the word to be guessed, starting from the beginning of the word. If a guessed letter matches the original letter, upon checking the answer, that letter is underlined with the equal sign (&#039;&#039;&#039;=&#039;&#039;&#039;). If the original letter&#039;s rank in the alphabet is situated &#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039; the letter typed by the student, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign (look before). And in the opposite case, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; (look behind) sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The difficulty of the exercise resides in a number of factors. It is easier to guess a sentence which has been recently memorised in class or a well-known saying or proverb or a verse from the lyrics of a well-known song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a Guess It Question ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:adding_guessit_question.jpg|none|frame]]&#039;&#039;&#039;Question name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter any name that is useful for organising your Questions; this name will not be displayed to the students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Instructions&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although this field shows the Required icon, it is in fact optional. Use this field to display any information that would help the student answer the question. All kind of text and media are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle option: Guess a word&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option will be explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Guessit word(s)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the field where you type the sentence that the student will have to guess, word by word. If you enter capitals and punctuation, they will be required for a correct answer, but help will be provided if they are missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Gap Size to display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Dynamic Gap Size&#039;&#039; = each gap will grow to accommodate longish words if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Proportional Gap Size&#039;&#039; = each gap will be set to the same size as the gapped out word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Fixed Gap Size&#039;&#039; = all gaps will be set to the same size as the largest gap.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the number of tries needed before the Help option becomes available. &#039;&#039;Never&#039;&#039; means that Help will never be available. Range available: Never, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the sentence to be guessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Remove specific feedback&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove specific feedback when all gaps have been correctly filled in and the question is submitted. This is only useful in special cases discussed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General feedback&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this in the same way as you would for any question type. Optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example scenario ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try0.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0.- Upon entering the game, the player is presented with a number of empty gaps corresponding to the number of words in the mysterious sentence.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1a.- Words are entered one by one in the provided gaps and you navigate to the next gap by pressing either the Tab or the Space keys. Since the &#039;&#039;Dynamic Gap Size&#039;&#039;  was selected in the options, the size of gap #4 will &amp;quot;grow&amp;quot; to accommodate the word &amp;quot;favourite&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1b.- When Check is pressed, specific feedback is provided in the &amp;quot;feedback&amp;quot; zone as follows: Gap 1 shows that the first word of the sentence should start with a capital letter. The yellow background tells that the word entered is partially correct. Gap 2 shows that the 2nd word has been correctly guessed, and the word is displayed on a green background. The words in gaps 3 to 4 are on a red (incorrect) background. For each partially or incorrect word in the answer, marks are displayed just under the first letter, showing whether the letter to be found is located after (&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) or before (the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) the letter entered, in the alphabet. The letter &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; is simply given.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2a. The player has entered &amp;quot;Spring is a lovely period&amp;quot;, taking care to enter words whose first letter matches the &amp;lt; or &amp;gt; marks previously given in the specific feedback. Note that when new words are entered in the incorrectly marked gaps (red background) their background is reset to white until Check is pressed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2b. Specific feedback is provided again. Note that specific back displayed in the &amp;quot;feedback zone&amp;quot; is added for each successive try and numbered. This is especially helpful for incorrect words. In the example above, the player now knows that the word in Gap 3 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; and before &amp;quot;m&amp;quot; in the alphabet; the word in Gap 4 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;l&amp;quot; and the word in Gap 5 begins with a letter before &amp;quot;p&amp;quot;. Before attempting a new try at guessing the incorrect words, the player decides to get some help by clicking on the Get help button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2c.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2c.- Since in the question Options we set &#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039; to 6, a relevant message is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.- 6a-. And the scenario continues, with each new try adding its own specific feedback to the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6a.- The student clicks on Get help, after the required set number of tries has been reached...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6b. The last missing word is given. Note that the final full stop is also given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try7.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.- Finished! The navigation box at the top left shows Question 1 Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Wordle option ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle_edit01.jpg|none|frame|Word error]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the default Guess It question type, the student/player has to guess a sentence made up of several words. If the Wordle Option is selected in the edit form, then they have to guess a single word. This is based on a recently popular word game, see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wordle Wikipedia article]. In this Guess It question type, Wordle can use any length of words, but the recommended default is 5 letters only. One limitation is that only CAPITAL LETTERS can be used, and no diacritics (accents). The above screen shows the ad hoc ERROR message displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle_edit02.jpg|none|frame|Fixed error]]&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended default number of tries is 10 but can be set at 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the word to be guessed. No help is provided other than the specific feedback colour scheme explained hereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 1 ===&lt;br /&gt;
For this scenario the word to be guesses is PIZZA and the maximum number of tries has been set to 6 (because this is a fairly common word, which should be guessed easily).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza0.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1]]&lt;br /&gt;
1.- The Wordle option only accepts UPPERCASE letters. If the player enters lowercase letters, they are automatically converted to uppercase. Each time the player enters a letter, the focus is placed on the next gap. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1a]]&lt;br /&gt;
When the last gap has been reached, the focus is placed on the Check button and the player can submit their answer by pressing either the Space or the Tab keys.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza1.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #2]]&lt;br /&gt;
2.- Feedback is provided using the same colouring scheme as for the regular Guessit game. Green for a correctly placed letter; yellow for a letter which is in the word but not correctly placed and red for a letter not in the word. The feedback message shows the distribution of the letters and the number of tries left.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza2.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #3]]&lt;br /&gt;
3.- As for the regular Guessit game, the successive tries are displayed. Here the player has correctly guessed the first letter (P) but none of their other letters are part of the work.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza3.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #4]]&lt;br /&gt;
4.- Looking better... not much choice of Italian food left, so...&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza5.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #5]]&lt;br /&gt;
5.- When the word is found, the Check button disappears. And the Info box displays Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 2 ===&lt;br /&gt;
Word to find in 6 tries: TIGER&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger0a.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #0]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #01]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger02.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #02]]&lt;br /&gt;
[... More tries ...]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger05.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #05]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger06.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #06]]&lt;br /&gt;
Since the max number of tries was set at 6, if the word in not found, it is &amp;quot;given&amp;quot;. Note that the current score is marked as Partially correct and 3/5. However, when the player submits their answer, the question is marked as Not answered and the score is 0/5, as displayed on following screenshot:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger07.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #07]]&lt;br /&gt;
Under the summary of previous tries the General Feedback message is displayed &amp;quot;Yes, quite ferocious&amp;quot;. Under it, the Partially correct and Score 3/5 are still displayed. There is currently no way to prevent this, so when this question is included in a Moodle Quiz, the Review options should be set to avoid this counter-intuitive display.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipo de pregunta Adivinanza]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:tiger07.jpg&amp;diff=151034</id>
		<title>File:tiger07.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:tiger07.jpg&amp;diff=151034"/>
		<updated>2025-02-05T21:49:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Screenshot #07&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:tiger06.jpg&amp;diff=151033</id>
		<title>File:tiger06.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:tiger06.jpg&amp;diff=151033"/>
		<updated>2025-02-05T21:45:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Screenshot #06&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:tiger05.jpg&amp;diff=151032</id>
		<title>File:tiger05.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:tiger05.jpg&amp;diff=151032"/>
		<updated>2025-02-05T21:45:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Screenshot #05&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:tiger02.jpg&amp;diff=151031</id>
		<title>File:tiger02.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:tiger02.jpg&amp;diff=151031"/>
		<updated>2025-02-05T21:42:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Screenshot #02&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:tiger01.jpg&amp;diff=151030</id>
		<title>File:tiger01.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:tiger01.jpg&amp;diff=151030"/>
		<updated>2025-02-05T21:41:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Screenshot #1&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=151029</id>
		<title>Guess it question type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=151029"/>
		<updated>2025-02-05T21:40:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Scenario 2 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = question type&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/rezeau/moodle-qtype_guessit/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[user:Joseph Rézeau|Joseph Rezeau]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installing this question type==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Warning|This question type is under development and not yet available in the Moodle plugins repository. It&#039;s available on my github repository but should not be installed on a Moodle production site.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the generic [[Installing plugins]] documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Guess It Question Type ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== History ===&lt;br /&gt;
Guess It  is an adaptation of a language game to be played on paper or on a classroom blackboard, dating back to the 1970s. It was one of the very first games I programmed on my [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Commodore_64 Commodore 64] in the mid 1980s.&lt;br /&gt;
I adapted Guess It to H5P a few years ago and it is still available on my Moodle/H5P test site [https://moodle/mod/page/view.php?id=34 here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rationale ===&lt;br /&gt;
The player (student) has to guess a &amp;quot;mystery sentence&amp;quot;, word by word. Each word entered by the student is compared letter by letter with the word to be guessed, starting from the beginning of the word. If a guessed letter matches the original letter, upon checking the answer, that letter is underlined with the equal sign (&#039;&#039;&#039;=&#039;&#039;&#039;). If the original letter&#039;s rank in the alphabet is situated &#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039; the letter typed by the student, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign (look before). And in the opposite case, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; (look behind) sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The difficulty of the exercise resides in a number of factors. It is easier to guess a sentence which has been recently memorised in class or a well-known saying or proverb or a verse from the lyrics of a well-known song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a Guess It Question ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:adding_guessit_question.jpg|none|frame]]&#039;&#039;&#039;Question name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter any name that is useful for organising your Questions; this name will not be displayed to the students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Instructions&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although this field shows the Required icon, it is in fact optional. Use this field to display any information that would help the student answer the question. All kind of text and media are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle option: Guess a word&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option will be explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Guessit word(s)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the field where you type the sentence that the student will have to guess, word by word. If you enter capitals and punctuation, they will be required for a correct answer, but help will be provided if they are missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Gap Size to display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Dynamic Gap Size&#039;&#039; = each gap will grow to accommodate longish words if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Proportional Gap Size&#039;&#039; = each gap will be set to the same size as the gapped out word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Fixed Gap Size&#039;&#039; = all gaps will be set to the same size as the largest gap.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the number of tries needed before the Help option becomes available. &#039;&#039;Never&#039;&#039; means that Help will never be available. Range available: Never, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the sentence to be guessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Remove specific feedback&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove specific feedback when all gaps have been correctly filled in and the question is submitted. This is only useful in special cases discussed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General feedback&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this in the same way as you would for any question type. Optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example scenario ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try0.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0.- Upon entering the game, the player is presented with a number of empty gaps corresponding to the number of words in the mysterious sentence.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1a.- Words are entered one by one in the provided gaps and you navigate to the next gap by pressing either the Tab or the Space keys. Since the &#039;&#039;Dynamic Gap Size&#039;&#039;  was selected in the options, the size of gap #4 will &amp;quot;grow&amp;quot; to accommodate the word &amp;quot;favourite&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1b.- When Check is pressed, specific feedback is provided in the &amp;quot;feedback&amp;quot; zone as follows: Gap 1 shows that the first word of the sentence should start with a capital letter. The yellow background tells that the word entered is partially correct. Gap 2 shows that the 2nd word has been correctly guessed, and the word is displayed on a green background. The words in gaps 3 to 4 are on a red (incorrect) background. For each partially or incorrect word in the answer, marks are displayed just under the first letter, showing whether the letter to be found is located after (&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) or before (the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) the letter entered, in the alphabet. The letter &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; is simply given.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2a. The player has entered &amp;quot;Spring is a lovely period&amp;quot;, taking care to enter words whose first letter matches the &amp;lt; or &amp;gt; marks previously given in the specific feedback. Note that when new words are entered in the incorrectly marked gaps (red background) their background is reset to white until Check is pressed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2b. Specific feedback is provided again. Note that specific back displayed in the &amp;quot;feedback zone&amp;quot; is added for each successive try and numbered. This is especially helpful for incorrect words. In the example above, the player now knows that the word in Gap 3 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; and before &amp;quot;m&amp;quot; in the alphabet; the word in Gap 4 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;l&amp;quot; and the word in Gap 5 begins with a letter before &amp;quot;p&amp;quot;. Before attempting a new try at guessing the incorrect words, the player decides to get some help by clicking on the Get help button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2c.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2c.- Since in the question Options we set &#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039; to 6, a relevant message is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.- 6a-. And the scenario continues, with each new try adding its own specific feedback to the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6a.- The student clicks on Get help, after the required set number of tries has been reached...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6b. The last missing word is given. Note that the final full stop is also given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try7.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.- Finished! The navigation box at the top left shows Question 1 Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Wordle option ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle_edit01.jpg|none|frame|Word error]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the default Guess It question type, the student/player has to guess a sentence made up of several words. If the Wordle Option is selected in the edit form, then they have to guess a single word. This is based on a recently popular word game, see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wordle Wikipedia article]. In this Guess It question type, Wordle can use any length of words, but the recommended default is 5 letters only. One limitation is that only CAPITAL LETTERS can be used, and no diacritics (accents). The above screen shows the ad hoc ERROR message displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle_edit02.jpg|none|frame|Fixed error]]&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended default number of tries is 10 but can be set at 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the word to be guessed. No help is provided other than the specific feedback colour scheme explained hereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 1 ===&lt;br /&gt;
For this scenario the word to be guesses is PIZZA and the maximum number of tries has been set to 6 (because this is a fairly common word, which should be guessed easily).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza0.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1]]&lt;br /&gt;
1.- The Wordle option only accepts UPPERCASE letters. If the player enters lowercase letters, they are automatically converted to uppercase. Each time the player enters a letter, the focus is placed on the next gap. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1a]]&lt;br /&gt;
When the last gap has been reached, the focus is placed on the Check button and the player can submit their answer by pressing either the Space or the Tab keys.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza1.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #2]]&lt;br /&gt;
2.- Feedback is provided using the same colouring scheme as for the regular Guessit game. Green for a correctly placed letter; yellow for a letter which is in the word but not correctly placed and red for a letter not in the word. The feedback message shows the distribution of the letters and the number of tries left.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza2.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #3]]&lt;br /&gt;
3.- As for the regular Guessit game, the successive tries are displayed. Here the player has correctly guessed the first letter (P) but none of their other letters are part of the work.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza3.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #4]]&lt;br /&gt;
4.- Looking better... not much choice of Italian food left, so...&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza5.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #5]]&lt;br /&gt;
5.- When the word is found, the Check button disappears. And the Info box displays Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 2 ===&lt;br /&gt;
Word to find in 6 tries: TIGER&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:tiger0a.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot0]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipo de pregunta Adivinanza]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:tiger0a.jpg&amp;diff=151028</id>
		<title>File:tiger0a.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:tiger0a.jpg&amp;diff=151028"/>
		<updated>2025-02-05T21:38:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;tiger0a&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=151027</id>
		<title>Guess it question type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=Guess_it_question_type&amp;diff=151027"/>
		<updated>2025-02-05T16:21:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: /* Scenario 1 */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox plugin&lt;br /&gt;
|type = question type&lt;br /&gt;
|entry = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|tracker = https://github.com/rezeau/moodle-qtype_guessit/issues&lt;br /&gt;
|discussion = https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qtype_guessit&lt;br /&gt;
|maintainer = [[user:Joseph Rézeau|Joseph Rezeau]]&lt;br /&gt;
|float = right&lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installing this question type==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Warning|This question type is under development and not yet available in the Moodle plugins repository. It&#039;s available on my github repository but should not be installed on a Moodle production site.}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow the generic [[Installing plugins]] documentation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Guess It Question Type ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== History ===&lt;br /&gt;
Guess It  is an adaptation of a language game to be played on paper or on a classroom blackboard, dating back to the 1970s. It was one of the very first games I programmed on my [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Commodore_64 Commodore 64] in the mid 1980s.&lt;br /&gt;
I adapted Guess It to H5P a few years ago and it is still available on my Moodle/H5P test site [https://moodle/mod/page/view.php?id=34 here].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rationale ===&lt;br /&gt;
The player (student) has to guess a &amp;quot;mystery sentence&amp;quot;, word by word. Each word entered by the student is compared letter by letter with the word to be guessed, starting from the beginning of the word. If a guessed letter matches the original letter, upon checking the answer, that letter is underlined with the equal sign (&#039;&#039;&#039;=&#039;&#039;&#039;). If the original letter&#039;s rank in the alphabet is situated &#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039; the letter typed by the student, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign (look before). And in the opposite case, the student&#039;s letter is marked with the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; (look behind) sign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The difficulty of the exercise resides in a number of factors. It is easier to guess a sentence which has been recently memorised in class or a well-known saying or proverb or a verse from the lyrics of a well-known song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a Guess It Question ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:adding_guessit_question.jpg|none|frame]]&#039;&#039;&#039;Question name&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter any name that is useful for organising your Questions; this name will not be displayed to the students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Instructions&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Although this field shows the Required icon, it is in fact optional. Use this field to display any information that would help the student answer the question. All kind of text and media are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Wordle option: Guess a word&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option will be explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Guessit word(s)&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the field where you type the sentence that the student will have to guess, word by word. If you enter capitals and punctuation, they will be required for a correct answer, but help will be provided if they are missing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Select Gap Size to display&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Dynamic Gap Size&#039;&#039; = each gap will grow to accommodate longish words if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Proportional Gap Size&#039;&#039; = each gap will be set to the same size as the gapped out word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Fixed Gap Size&#039;&#039; = all gaps will be set to the same size as the largest gap.&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the number of tries needed before the Help option becomes available. &#039;&#039;Never&#039;&#039; means that Help will never be available. Range available: Never, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the sentence to be guessed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Remove specific feedback&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Remove specific feedback when all gaps have been correctly filled in and the question is submitted. This is only useful in special cases discussed below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;General feedback&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use this in the same way as you would for any question type. Optional.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Example scenario ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try0.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
0.- Upon entering the game, the player is presented with a number of empty gaps corresponding to the number of words in the mysterious sentence.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1a.- Words are entered one by one in the provided gaps and you navigate to the next gap by pressing either the Tab or the Space keys. Since the &#039;&#039;Dynamic Gap Size&#039;&#039;  was selected in the options, the size of gap #4 will &amp;quot;grow&amp;quot; to accommodate the word &amp;quot;favourite&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try1b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1b.- When Check is pressed, specific feedback is provided in the &amp;quot;feedback&amp;quot; zone as follows: Gap 1 shows that the first word of the sentence should start with a capital letter. The yellow background tells that the word entered is partially correct. Gap 2 shows that the 2nd word has been correctly guessed, and the word is displayed on a green background. The words in gaps 3 to 4 are on a red (incorrect) background. For each partially or incorrect word in the answer, marks are displayed just under the first letter, showing whether the letter to be found is located after (&#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) or before (the &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039; sign) the letter entered, in the alphabet. The letter &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; is simply given.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2a. The player has entered &amp;quot;Spring is a lovely period&amp;quot;, taking care to enter words whose first letter matches the &amp;lt; or &amp;gt; marks previously given in the specific feedback. Note that when new words are entered in the incorrectly marked gaps (red background) their background is reset to white until Check is pressed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2b. Specific feedback is provided again. Note that specific back displayed in the &amp;quot;feedback zone&amp;quot; is added for each successive try and numbered. This is especially helpful for incorrect words. In the example above, the player now knows that the word in Gap 3 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;a&amp;quot; and before &amp;quot;m&amp;quot; in the alphabet; the word in Gap 4 begins with a letter after &amp;quot;l&amp;quot; and the word in Gap 5 begins with a letter before &amp;quot;p&amp;quot;. Before attempting a new try at guessing the incorrect words, the player decides to get some help by clicking on the Get help button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try2c.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2c.- Since in the question Options we set &#039;&#039;&#039;How many tries before giving help&#039;&#039;&#039; to 6, a relevant message is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.- 6a-. And the scenario continues, with each new try adding its own specific feedback to the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6a.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6a.- The student clicks on Get help, after the required set number of tries has been reached...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try6b.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6b. The last missing word is given. Note that the final full stop is also given.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:try7.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7.- Finished! The navigation box at the top left shows Question 1 Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Wordle option ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Edit form ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle_edit01.jpg|none|frame|Word error]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the default Guess It question type, the student/player has to guess a sentence made up of several words. If the Wordle Option is selected in the edit form, then they have to guess a single word. This is based on a recently popular word game, see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wordle Wikipedia article]. In this Guess It question type, Wordle can use any length of words, but the recommended default is 5 letters only. One limitation is that only CAPITAL LETTERS can be used, and no diacritics (accents). The above screen shows the ad hoc ERROR message displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:wordle_edit02.jpg|none|frame|Fixed error]]&lt;br /&gt;
The recommended default number of tries is 10 but can be set at 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. Set this according to the level of difficulty of  the word to be guessed. No help is provided other than the specific feedback colour scheme explained hereafter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 1 ===&lt;br /&gt;
For this scenario the word to be guesses is PIZZA and the maximum number of tries has been set to 6 (because this is a fairly common word, which should be guessed easily).&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza0.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1]]&lt;br /&gt;
1.- The Wordle option only accepts UPPERCASE letters. If the player enters lowercase letters, they are automatically converted to uppercase. Each time the player enters a letter, the focus is placed on the next gap. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza01.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #1a]]&lt;br /&gt;
When the last gap has been reached, the focus is placed on the Check button and the player can submit their answer by pressing either the Space or the Tab keys.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza1.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #2]]&lt;br /&gt;
2.- Feedback is provided using the same colouring scheme as for the regular Guessit game. Green for a correctly placed letter; yellow for a letter which is in the word but not correctly placed and red for a letter not in the word. The feedback message shows the distribution of the letters and the number of tries left.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza2.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #3]]&lt;br /&gt;
3.- As for the regular Guessit game, the successive tries are displayed. Here the player has correctly guessed the first letter (P) but none of their other letters are part of the work.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza3.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #4]]&lt;br /&gt;
4.- Looking better... not much choice of Italian food left, so...&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:pizza5.jpg|none|frame|Screenshot #5]]&lt;br /&gt;
5.- When the word is found, the Check button disappears. And the Info box displays Correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scenario 2 ===&lt;br /&gt;
Word to find in 6 tries: TIGER&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Quiz]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Language teaching]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipo de pregunta Adivinanza]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:pizza5.jpg&amp;diff=151026</id>
		<title>File:pizza5.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/500/en/index.php?title=File:pizza5.jpg&amp;diff=151026"/>
		<updated>2025-02-05T16:15:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Rezeau: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;pizza5&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Rezeau</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>